You are on page 1of 320

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL

H 71 0200 0016 k en

Revision history
Index a b c d e e f g h k Date 26.07.1999 11.02.2000 28.09.2000 18.06.2001 12.03.2002 25.06.2002 19.07.2002 06.12.2002 31.03.2003 01.05.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections Changes in related sections New layout according to CI, Changes in related sections Chapter 4.1 in Chapter 4 enclosed (H71 0200 0022 not further needed) Section 4.16 new, section 4.1 integrated in section 4 (H 71 0200 0022 omitted). Changes in related sections for software version B21.

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 0-2

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history

List of associated sections


The user manual H 71 0200 0016 en comprises the following sections: Section 1 2 3 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Designation Safety Description of unit and technical data Mechanical construction Function Overview Measuring unit Inputs and outputs Calendar clock Time switch Ripple control receiver Tariff control Energy recording Demand recording Power factors Operating time registers Formation of billing periods (resetting) Profiles Monitoring functions Security system Operating messages Control elements and displays Communication interfaces Installation and commissioning Maintenance and service Error messages and measures in event of faults Decommissioning, disposal Index Identification H 71 0200 0019 en H 71 0200 0018 en H 71 0200 0020 en H 71 0200 0021 en H 71 0200 0021 en H 71 0200 0023 en H 71 0200 0036 en H 71 0200 0243 en H 71 0200 0029 en H 71 0200 0030 en H 71 0200 0026 en H 71 0200 0024 en H 71 0200 0025 en H 71 0200 0033 en H 71 0200 0244 en H 71 0200 0245 en H 71 0200 0032 en H 71 0200 0031 en H 71 0200 0038 en H 71 0200 0242 en H 71 0200 0035 en H 71 0200 0247 en H 71 0200 0039 en H 71 0200 0041 en H 71 0200 0042 en H 71 0200 0043 en H 71 0200 0034 en

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual List of associated sections

Landis+Gyr 0-3

Table of contents
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 2.2.16 2.2.17 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 Safety ____________________________________________1-5 Safety information ___________________________________________1-5 Responsibilities ______________________________________________1-5 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 Description of unit and technical data ____________________2-5 Survey_____________________________________________________2-5 General view ________________________________________________2-5 Purpose of use ______________________________________________2-6 Field of application ___________________________________________2-7 Type designation ____________________________________________2-9 Review of main characteristics _________________________________2-10 Technical data _____________________________________________2-12 Voltage values _____________________________________________2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 1 A _____2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5 A _____2-12 Secondary current values for transformer rated current In = 5//1 A 2-13 Secondary starting values ____________________________________2-13 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-14 Power consumption _________________________________________2-14 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________2-14 Calendar clock _____________________________________________2-15 Output values ______________________________________________2-15 Inputs and outputs __________________________________________2-16 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-17 Supplementary power supply __________________________________2-17 Voltage behaviour___________________________________________2-17 External influences __________________________________________2-18 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________2-19 Connections _______________________________________________2-20 Connection diagrams ________________________________________2-21 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks ______________________2-21 Meters for three-phase four-wire networks _______________________2-22 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________2-23 Extension board ____________________________________________2-23

Landis+Gyr 0-4

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2

Mechanical construction ______________________________3-5 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 Face plate_________________________________________________ 3-10 Function ________________________________________ 4.1-7 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-7 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-7 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-9 Signal processing _________________________________________ 4.1-10 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-10 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1-10 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.1-11 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.1-11 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.1-11 Extension board __________________________________________ 4.1-11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-12 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-5 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-5 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-7 Signal processing __________________________________________ 4.1-8 Signal utilization___________________________________________ 4.1-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.1-8 Data preparation for billing __________________________________ 4.1-9 Memory _________________________________________________ 4.1-9 Power supply _____________________________________________ 4.1-9 Supplementary power supply ________________________________ 4.1-9 Extension board ___________________________________________ 4.1-9 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-10 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-10 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6
Landis+Gyr 0-5

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5
Landis+Gyr 0-6

Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs__________________________________ 4.3-11 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Summer/winter time________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Power reserve_____________________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal ______________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface______________________ 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.4-10 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 Tariff control via ripple control receiver _________________________ 4.6-5 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.6-12 Tariff control ______________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions _________________________________________ 4.7-7 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.7-8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.8-10
H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10 4.9.11 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.11 4.11.1 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 4.13.3 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 4.14.4 4.14.5 4.14.6

Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.8-10 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.8-12 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period _________________ 4.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9-19 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.10-8 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.10-9 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8
Landis+Gyr 0-7

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

4.14.7 4.15 4.15.1 4.15.2 4.15.3 4.15.4 4.15.5 4.16 4.16.1 4.16.2 4.16.3 5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.4 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3

Power factor monitoring____________________________________ 4.14-9 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security levels____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 Security levels and their application___________________________ 4.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9 Operating messages _______________________________________ 4.16-5 Survey__________________________________________________ 4.16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 Display buttons ______________________________________________5-5 Control of display via optical interface ____________________________5-5 Reset button ________________________________________________5-6 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________5-7 Introduction ________________________________________________5-7 Basic layout_________________________________________________5-7 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 Display list_________________________________________________5-11 Service list_________________________________________________5-14 Optical test output __________________________________________5-16 Communication interfaces_____________________________6-5 Survey_____________________________________________________6-5 Optical interface _____________________________________________6-6 S0 interface_________________________________________________6-6 RS232 interface _____________________________________________6-7 RS485 interface _____________________________________________6-7 CS interface ________________________________________________6-8 M-Bus interface______________________________________________6-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________6-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________6-10 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________6-12

Landis+Gyr 0-8

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

6.9 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 8 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.3 8.4 8.5 9 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4 10 10.1 10.2 11

Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Connection to low voltage with current transformers________________ 7-6 Connection to medium and high voltage (Aron circuit) ______________ 7-6 Connection to medium and high voltage (three-phase four-wire circuit) 7-8 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-9 Connecting meter __________________________________________ 7-11 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-15 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-16 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 Changing the battery ________________________________________ 8-11 Error messages and measures in event of faults ____________9-5 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 Structure of an error message _________________________________ 9-5 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 Disconnecting meters _______________________________________ 9-11 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)_______________ 9-13 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14 Decommissioning, disposal ___________________________10-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 Index____________________________________________11-3

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 0-9

Introduction
Range of validity Purpose The present user manual applies to the meters specified on the title page. The user manual contains all the information required for application of the meters for the intended purpose. This includes: Provision of knowledge concerning characteristics, construction and function of the meters Information about possible dangers, their consequences and measures to prevent any danger Details concerning the performance of all work throughout the service life of the meters (parametrization, installation, commissioning, operation, maintenance, shutting down and disposal) Target group The contents of this user manual are intended for technically qualified personnel of energy supply companies responsible for the system planning, installation and commissioning, operation, maintenance, decommissioning and disposal of the meters. Users of this manual are familiar from their training with the basic principles of electrical engineering, in particular with the principles of energy measurement, including circuitry types, connection technology, etc. This user manual is divided in a logical manner suitable for learning and application, i.e. the individual chapters follow the sequence of information probably required during the various phases of the service life of the meters. This provides the following structure: Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Safety Description of unit and technical data Mechanical construction Function Control elements and displays Communication interfaces Installation and commissioning Maintenance and service Error messages and measures in event of faults

Conditions

Subdivision

Chapter 10 Decommissioning, disposal Chapter 11 Index

Landis+Gyr 0-10

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Introduction

Type designation

The structure and significance of meter type designations are described in chapter 2 "Description of unit and technical data". The following conventions are employed in this user manual for representing type designations: The lower case letter "x" can be used as an unknown to indicate different versions (e.g. ZxD410xT for the ZFD410AT, ZMD410AT, ZFD410CT and ZMD410CT meters). The digit pair "00" can be used to indicate accuracy data (e.g. ZxD400xx for the ZxD405xx and ZxD410xx meters). The abbreviated type designation ZMD or ZFD meters can be used when all three-phase four-wire meters or three-phase three-wire meters are meant. The following collective terms are also sometimes used instead of the type designation: - "Direct connection meters" for the ZMD300xx meters - "Transformer connection meters" for the ZxD400xx meters - "Active energy meters" for the ZMD300Ax and ZxD400Ax meters - "Combimeters" for the ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx meters Of the four digit extension board designation (e.g. 2400) only the first 3 digits represent the function of the board; the fourth digit is an unknown (the first 3 digits in the type designation, e.g. 240, are used for details of additional functions, while the fourth digit indicates whether a load profile is present or not).

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Introduction

Landis+Gyr 0-11

Landis+Gyr 0-12

H 71 0200 0016 k en - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Introduction

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

Safety

H 71 0200 0019 b en

Revision history
Index a b Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 1-2

H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Safety ___________________________________________ 1-5 Safety information ___________________________________________ 1-5 Responsibilities ______________________________________________ 1-5 Safety regulations ___________________________________________ 1-6

H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 1-3

Landis+Gyr 1-4

H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Safety
This section describes the safety information used in this manual, outlines the responsibilities and lists the safety regulations to be observed.

1.1

Safety information
Attention is drawn as follows in the individual chapters of this user manual with classified word symbols and pictographs to the relevant danger level, i.e. the severity and probability of any danger: Definition of Danger

Danger

For a possibly dangerous situation, which could result in severe physical injury or fatality.

Definition of Warning

Warning

For a possibly dangerous situation, which could result in minor physical injury or material damage. Definition of Note

Note

For general details and other useful information to simplify the work. In addition to the danger level, all safety information also describes the type and source of the danger, its possible consequences and measures to counteract the danger.

1.2

Responsibilities
The owner of the meters normally the power supply company is responsible that all persons engaged on work with meters: 1. 2. 3. Have read and understood the relevant sections of the user manual. Are sufficiently qualified for the work to be performed. Strictly observe the safety regulations (according to section 1.3) and the operating information in the individual chapters.

In particular, the owner of the meters bears responsibility for the protection of persons, prevention of material damage and the training of personnel. Landis+Gyr AG provides training courses for this purpose on specific equipment; please contact the relevant agent if interested.

H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Safety

Landis+Gyr 1-5

1.3

Safety regulations
The following safety regulations must be observed at all times: The conductors to which the meter will be connected must not be under voltage during installation or change of the meter. Contact with live parts is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until the work is completed, so that other persons cannot replace them unnoticed. Local safety regulations must be observed. Installation of the meters must be performed exclusively by technically qualified and suitably trained personnel. Secondary circuits of current transformers must be short-circuited (at the test terminal block) without fail before opening. The high voltage produced by the interrupted current transformer is dangerous to life and destroys the transformer. Transformers in medium or high voltage systems must be earthed on one side or at the neutral point on the secondary side. Otherwise they can be statically charged to a voltage which exceeds the insulation strength of the meter and is also dangerous to life. The meters must be held securely during installation. They can cause injuries if dropped. Meters which have fallen must not be installed, even if no damage is apparent. They must be returned for testing to the service and repair department responsible (or the manufacturer). Internal damage can result in functional disorders or short-circuits. The meters must on no account be cleaned with running water or with high pressure devices. Water penetrating can cause short-circuits.

Landis+Gyr 1-6

H 71 0200 0019 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Safety

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL

Description of unit and technical data

H 71 0200 0136 d en

Revision history
Index a b c d Date 28.02.2002 14.01.2002 18.04.2002 29.07.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Maximum current 120 A under special conditions Extension board 600x (6 control inputs) cancelled Chapt. 1.2.8 Meter constant 2000 pulses per kWh dropped New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Operating messages function new, software version section new, technical data adapted

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 2-2

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 2.2.15 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 Description of unit and technical data ____________________2-5 Survey ____________________________________________________ 2-5 General view _______________________________________________ 2-5 Purpose of use ______________________________________________ 2-6 Field of application___________________________________________ 2-6 Type designation ____________________________________________ 2-8 Review of main characteristics _________________________________ 2-9 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 Voltage values _____________________________________________ 2-11 Current values _____________________________________________ 2-11 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 Frequency values ___________________________________________ 2-12 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 Calendar clock _____________________________________________ 2-13 Output values______________________________________________ 2-13 Inputs and outputs _________________________________________ 2-13 Serial interface _____________________________________________ 2-14 Supplementary power supply _________________________________ 2-14 Voltage behaviour __________________________________________ 2-14 External influences__________________________________________ 2-15 Weight and dimensions ______________________________________ 2-16 Connections _______________________________________________ 2-17 Connection diagrams ________________________________________ 2-19 Meters for three-phase three-wire networks______________________ 2-19 Control inputs / output contacts _______________________________ 2-19 Extension board ____________________________________________ 2-20

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 2-3

Landis+Gyr 2-4

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Description of unit and technical data


This chapter provides you with a brief overview of the meters ZMD300xT. It also specifies their technical data and shows the most common connection diagrams.

2.1
2.1.1

Survey
General view
The ZMD300xT meters have the following appearance, with the ZMD300CT combimeter having two optical test outputs (for reactive and active energy consumption) while the ZMD300AT active energy meter has only one for active energy:

Fig. 2.1

General view of meter (example ZMD300CT)

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-5

Case

The meter case is made of antistatic plastic (polycarbonate). The upper part of the case is provided with two transparent plastic viewing windows, affording a view of the main face plate (top) and the tariff face plate (bottom). The lower part of the case is additionally glass-fibre reinforced. For further details refer to material list no. H 71 0264 0060. The upper viewing window with the main face plate is secured on the upper right side with a calibration seal, while the upper part of the case is secured on the upper left side with a manufacturer seal (warranty) or a second calibration seal. The lower viewing window is in the form of a hinged front door, secured with a company seal. The tariff face plate with the connection diagram on the rear side, the battery compartment, the reset button and (if present) the communication unit are situated under this front door. The terminal cover is available in various lengths in order to ensure the required free space for the connections.

Main and tariff face plate

All relevant data for the meter are provided on the face plates inscribed in utility specific form. Openings enable the operation of the two display buttons and ensure an uninterrupted view of the liquid crystal display, the optical test outputs and the optical interface for automatic readout of meter data.

2.1.2

Purpose of use
The combimeters ZMD300CT record active and reactive energy consumption in three-phase four-wire networks on low voltage and from this determine the required electrical measured quantities. They are connected directly to the phase conductors at the measuring point. The data determined are displayed (LCD) and are also available at the optical interface for data acquisition, with communication unit also as required via CS, RS232, RS485, PSTN modem, GSM modem, etc. When provided with transmission contacts, the meters can also be used as transmission contact meters for telemetering. The tariffs can be controlled internally or externally. With communication unit the meters can also be used for recording counting pulses for other physical media (e.g. water or gas volumes). Any other application of these meters is considered not for the intended purpose.

2.1.3

Field of application
The combimeters ZMD300CT can be used for direct connection at the low voltage level. They are primarily used by medium consumers. ZMD300CT meters have a comprehensive tariff structure. This extends from seasonal tariffs to multiple energy and demand tariffs.

Additional functions

ZMD300CT meters can be supplemented with various additional functions, including: Energy recording as advance Measurement of individual phases

Landis+Gyr 2-6

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Measurement of instantaneous values - Voltages - Currents - Frequency - Phase angles Power factor cos (ZMD300CT only) Calculation of apparent consumption (ZMD300CT only) Sliding maximum demand Load profile memory - Demand - Energy - Voltages, currents and frequency - Power factor cos (ZMD300CT only) Stored values Event log memory Monitoring - of voltage, current and demand - of power factor (ZMD300CT only) Event signals for - voltage failures - undervoltage and overvoltage occurencies - exceeding of current and demand limits - falling below power factor limits (ZMD300CT only) - Status messages Time switch integrated ripple control receiver Pulse inputs for external meters Additional control inputs and output contacts in a permanently fitted extension board Background lighting for LCD display (optional) LCD display readable without power supply (battery required) Installation aids Interfaces for various communication forms and paths in an exchangeable communication unit situated outside the calibration liability. Signalling of important events as operating messages to the power supply company (sending of SMS messages, control of an arrow in the display, drive for an output contact, etc.) Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present.
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data Landis+Gyr 2-7

More detailed information concerning individual exchangeable communication unit can be found in the relevant separate user manuals.

2.1.4

Type designation
ZMD 310 CT 44.4207
Type of circuit
ZFD ZMD 3 4 10 05 C A
Three-phase three-wire network (F circuit, Aron circuit) Three-phase four-wire network (M circuit)

Type of connection
Direct connection with digital measuring system Transformer connection with digital measuring system

Accuracy class
1 to IEC 0.5 to IEC Active and reactive energy
Active energy

Measured quantities

Design
T R Complex tariff functions, modular communication Complex tariff functions, integrated interface Energy tariffs; external tariff control via control inputs Energy tariffs; internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs) Energy and demand tariffs; external tariff control via control inputs Energy and demand tariffs; internal tariff control via time switch (additionally possible via control inputs) All versions with 3 control inputs and 2 output contacts.

Version
21 24 41 44

Additional functions
Additional control inputs on extension board 0 2 4 No additional control inputs 2 additional control inputs 4 additional control inputs

Additional output contacts on extension board 0 No additional output contacts 2 2 additional output contacts 4 4 additional output contacts 6 6 additional output contacts Hardware functions on extension board 0 No additional hardware 3 Integrated ripple control receiver 5 Supplementary power supply Profile 0 7 No load profile Load profile

The codes for version, additional functions and communication unit are not normally specified in the type designation in this user manual, unless necessary for understanding. The communication unit is not a part of this type designation, since it is a complete unit in itself. Users can change it at any time without opening the calibration seal. Every communication unit has its own user manual. Series designation The hardware version is distinguished by the series designation. The 1st hardware generation (series 1) has no series designation, while for the 2nd
H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-8

hardware generation (series 2) the series designation S2 is printed on the nameplate directly after the type designation. Software version The software version stored in the meter cannot be recognised externally. It can, however, be determined by reading out the meter identification (see section 6.8 "Data readout possibilities"). Specific meter characteristics are present or not depending on the software version. For example by parametrizing from software version B20 the form of phase angle representation can be selected or from software version B21 operating messages for the occurrence of important events can be signalled to the power supply company as SMS messages.

2.1.5

Review of main characteristics


ZMD300xT meters have the following basic characteristics: Recording of active, reactive and apparent energy in all four quadrants (ZMD300CT) or recording of active energy imported and exported (ZMD300AT) Tariff system with energy and demand tariffs, stored values, load profiles etc. Extended functions such as monitoring functions, sliding maximum demand, etc. (for ZMD300CT additionally power factor cos) Tariff control - External via control inputs (ZMD300xT21 and ZMD300xT41) - Internal - by integral time switch (ZMD300xT24 and ZMD300xT44) - by event signals based on monitored values as voltage, current demand etc. or - by integrated ripple control receiver (extension board 0030/0430) Display of data with a liquid crystal display (LCD) Active and reactive power per phase and true RMS values of voltages and currents by means of digital signal processing (DSP) chips Compliance with IEC accuracy class 1 for active energy consumption and class 1 for reactive energy (ZMD300CT) Flexible measuring system through parametrization (definition of different variables by software) Wide range of measurement from starting current to maximum current Optical interface according to IEC 62056-21 and DLMS - fr die direkte Auslesung der Zhlerdaten - for service functions of meter, extension board and communication unit (e.g. parametrization) Inputs for recording fixed valency pulses (communication unit) Output contacts (solid-state relays) for fixed valency pulses, control signals and status messages Installation aids

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-9

- Indication of phase voltages, phase angles, rotating field and direction of energy Storage of event information, e.g. voltage failures, exceeding of thresholds or error messages. Event information can be read out via the available interfaces. Important events can be communicated to the power supply company as operating messages (sending of SMS messages, control of an arrow in the display, drive for an output contact, etc.). Interfaces such as CS, RS232, RS485, modem, etc. for remote transmission of data (communication unit) Supplementary power supply for communication with the meter if no measuring voltage is present

Landis+Gyr 2-10

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

2.2
2.2.1

Technical data
Voltage values
Rated voltage Un ZMD300xT - Permissible range ........................... 3 x 110/190 V to 3 x 240/415 V Note: This meter can also be operated with only one or two phases without loss of accuracy. Voltage range ............................................................. 0.8 to 1.15 x Un

2.2.2

Current values
Basic current Ib ....................................... selectable: 5, 10, 20 or 40 A Maximum current Imax ............... selectable: 40, 60, 80, 100 or 120 A Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted, if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used. Starting current According to IEC ................................................................... 0.5 % Ib Typical ..................................................................... approx. 0.3 % Ib Note: The meter uses the starting power, not the starting current, to determine the starting limit. Maximum measuring range ............................ approx. 15 mA to 120 A Note: The maximum current 100 or 120 A is only permitted, if the terminal opening has a diameter of 9.5 mm and a conductor cross-section of 35 mm2 is used. Loading capacity Measurements ........................................................................... 120 A Thermal .................................................................................... 120 A Short-circuit 10 ms ................................................................ 5000 A

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-11

2.2.3

Starting values
Typical starting power at rated voltage of 230 V Related to basic current Ib M circuit approx. 5 3.5 10 7 20 15 40 .A 30 W

The meter measures as soon as a phase reaches the specified starting power.

2.2.4

Frequency values
Rated frequency fn ............................................................ 50 or 60 Hz Frequency range ................................... see 2.2.6 "Measuring accuracy"

2.2.5

Power consumption
Power consumption per phase Communication unit without CU with CU For phase voltage (full load) ........................ 100 V ................... 100 V Active power (typical) .................................. 0.6 W ................... 0.8 W Apparent power (typical) ............................ 0.8 VA .................. 1.0 VA For phase voltage (full load) ........................ 240 V ................... 240 V Active power (typical) .................................. 1.1 W ................... 1.3 W Apparent power (typical) ............................ 1.5 VA .................. 1.8 VA Current path (typical) .................................................................. 10 A Apparent power (typical) ........................................................ 0.03 VA

2.2.6

Measuring accuracy
Accuracy Accuracy class to IEC 61036 .................................................... Class 1 Absolute accuracy active (with balanced load and cos = 1) .......................................... 1.0 % Absolute accuracy reactive (ZMD300CT only)............................ 1.0 % Note: The combimeter ZMD300CT scarcely reveals higher measurement deviations for reactive energy as for active energy consumption. Hence accuracy class 1 applies also to the reactive part for ZMD300CT.

Landis+Gyr 2-12

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

2.2.7

Calendar clock
Movement accuracy .............................................................. < 5 ppm Power reserve for bridging voltage interruptions Supercap ................................................................... typically 20 days Battery (optional) ................................................................. 10 years Note: The power reserve of the battery is reduced if the LCD is repeatedly switched on by pressing the display buttons when no voltage is applied.

2.2.8

Output values
Display Type ............................................................. LCD liquid crystal display Digit size value field ................................................................... 8 mm Number of positions value field ................................................ up to 8 Digit size index field ................................................................... 6 mm Number of positions index field ................................................ up to 8 Meter constant R selectable ...................................... 500, 1000 pulses per kWh or kvarh Test output active and reactive power (ZxD400xT) Type ..................................................................................... LED red Pulse frequency (dependent on meter constant R and measured value) - at Un and 10 A .................................................. approx.1, 2 or 4 Hz - maximum .............................................................................. 20 Hz Pulse width ........................................................................ 2 or 40 ms

2.2.9

Inputs and outputs


Control inputs Control voltage Ut ....................................................... 100 to 240 VAC Current input ............................................... < 2 mA ohmic at 230 VAC Note: Same meter for all voltages by re-parametrization. Output contacts Type .......................................................................... solid-state relay Voltage ................................................................ 12 to 240 VAC/VDC

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-13

Current .......................................................................... max. 100 mA Switching frequency .......................................................... max. 50 Hz

2.2.10

Serial interface
Optical interface Type ...................................................... serial, bi-directional interface Max. baud rate .................................................................. 9600 Baud Standards ............ IEC 62056-21 and dlms (IEC 62056-42/46/53/61/62) Application ........................................... Data readout, service functions

2.2.11

Supplementary power supply


Situated on extension board type 0250 Nominal voltage range ................... 100 to 160 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC Operation range ......................................................... 80 to 115 % Un Frequency range ............................................................... 50 or 60 Hz Power consumption ................................................................... 2.2 W

2.2.12

Voltage behaviour
Voltage interruption Bridging time .................................................... according to IEC 0.5 s Data storage ............................................................ after further 0.2 s Disconnection ........................................................ after approx. 2.5 s
Un Bridging time

Data saved Display switched off

0 after 0.5 s 0.7 s approx. 2.5 s

Fig. 2.2

Behaviour in event of voltage failure

Restoration of voltage Ready for service (depending on duration of failure) ........after 1 to 5 s* Recognition of energy direction and phase voltage .......... after 1 to 3 s* * operated with 3 phases

Landis+Gyr 2-14

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Un

Detection of energy direction and phase voltages max. 3 s max. 5 s

All functions available t

Fig. 2.3

Behaviour when voltage restored

2.2.13

External influences
Temperature range Operation ................................................................. -25 C to +70 C Storage .................................................................... -40 C to +85 C Temperature coefficient Range ................................................................ from -25C to +70C Typical mean value .................................................... 0.012 % per K With cos=1 (from 0.05 In to Imax) ............................. 0.02 % per K With cos=0.5 (from 0.1 In to Imax) ............................ 0.03 % per K Protection class ...................................................... IP 51 to IEC 60529 Electromagnetic compatibility Electrostatic discharges .............................................. to IEC 61000-4-2 - Contact discharges ................................................................. 15 kV Electromagnetic high frequency fields ................. to nach IEC 61000-4-3 - 80 MHz to 2 GHz ................................................... 10 or 30 V per m Line transients (Burst)................................................ to IEC 61000-4-4 - for current and voltage circuits not under load .......................... 4 kV - for current and voltage circuits under load to IEC 62053-21/22/23 ............................................................. 2 kV - for auxiliary circuits > 40 V ...................................................... 1 kV Line transients (Surge)............................................... to IEC 61000-4-5 - for current and voltage circuits ................................................. 4 kV - for auxiliary circuits > 40 V ...................................................... 1 kV Radio interference suppression ....................... to IEC/CISPR 22 Class B Insulation strength .......................................... 4 kV at 50 Hz for 1 min

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-15

Impulse voltage strength Impulse voltage 1.2/50s mains connections ................................. 8 kV Impulse voltage 1.2/50s control connections ............................... 6 kV

2.2.14

Weight and dimensions


Weight ........................................................................... approx. 1.5 kg External dimensions ......................................... comply with DIN 43857 Width .................................................................................... 177 mm Height (with short terminal cover) ........................................... 244 mm Height (with standard terminal cover) .................................. 281.5 mm Depth ..................................................................................... 75 mm Suspension triangle Height (suspension eyelet open) ............................................. 206 mm Height (suspension eyelet covered) ......................................... 190 mm Width .................................................................................... 150 mm Terminal cover Short ............................................................................. no free space Standard ................................................................ 40 mm free space Long ...................................................................... 60 mm free space

Landis+Gyr 2-16

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

6.2

75

206

150 177

40

26

75

Fig. 2.4

Meter dimensions (standard terminal cover)

2.2.15

Connections
Phase connections Type ................................................................... screw type terminals Diameter .... 8.5 mm for Imax up to 80 A, 9.5 mm for Imax up to 100 A ...............................(up to 120 A with conductor cross-section 35 mm2) Maximum conductor cross-section - cable ............................................................ 35 mm2 (up to 120 A) - strand ............................................................. 25 mm2 (up to 80 A) Minimum conductor cross-section ............................................. 4 mm2 Screw dimensions .................................................................. M6 x 14 - head diameter ........................................................... max. 6.6 mm - cross-slot ...................................... type Z, size 2, to ISO-4757-1983 - slot ................................................................ 0.8 +0.2/+0.06 mm Tightening torque ............................................................. max. 3 Nm Adaptation to plug adapters for Geyer terminals, ODU contacts, Amphenol Tuchel plugs is ensured.

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-17

281.5

190

Other connections Type ............................................... screwless spring-loaded terminals Maximum current of voltage outputs .............................................. 1 A Maximum voltage of inputs ........................................................ 250 V
r 5o 9.5

19.75

14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5

12

Spacings of terminal openings Spacings of terminal stampings for smaller conductors

19

16

13

16

13

16

13

13.5

Fig. 2.5

Terminal dimensions

Landis+Gyr 2-18

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

15.3

2.3

Connection diagrams
Binding connection diagrams

Note

The following connection diagrams should be considered examples. The connection diagrams provided at the rear of the front door and visible when the door is open are always binding for the installation.

2.3.1

Meters for three-phase three-wire networks

ZMD300xT

2 1 L1 L2 L3 N

2 3 4

5 6 7

8 9 10

11 11 12 x xx x x x

Fig. 2.6

Connection diagram of measuring unit ZMD300xT

2.3.2

Control inputs / output contacts


K1 K2

Basic version: 3 control inputs

Beispiel:

G E1 P1 mB

2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal assignment and numbering of terminals for free parametrization

15 13 14 16

40 41 42

100 - 240 V

Fig. 2.7

Connection diagram fixed control inputs / output contacts (example)

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-19

2.3.3
4200

Extension board
K3 K4

Extension board 4200 4 control inputs

KA KB

G E2 P2

2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal assignment and numbering of terminals for free parametrization

15 15 18 19

15 33 34

44 43 45

Fig. 2.8

Connection diagram extension board with 4 control inputs and 2 output contacts (example)
K3 K4 K5 K6

2400

Extension board 2400 2 control inputs


G KA KB

4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization

15 15 18 19

44 43 45

47 46 48

Fig. 2.9

Connection diagram extension board with 2 control inputs and 4 output contacts (example)
K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

0600

K3

Extension board 0600 no control inputs 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization

44 44 43 45

47 46 48

50 49 51

Fig. 2.10

Connection diagram extension board with 6 output contacts (example)

Landis+Gyr 2-20

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

0250

K3

K4

Extension board 0250 with supplementary power supply no control inputs 2 output contacts (solid-state relays)

61 61

64 64

54 53 55

Signal allocation and numbering of terminals for free parametrization

100 ... 240 V AC 100 ... 160 V DC

Fig. 2.11

Connection diagram extension board with supplementary power supply (example)


Extension board 0030 with ripple control receiver no control inputs no output contacts

0030

30 Lx

Signal allocation for free parametrization

Fig. 2.12

Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver (example)


K3 K4 K5 K6

0430
E

Extension board 0430 with ripple control receiver no control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

30 Lx

61

61 62 63

64 65 66

Fig. 2.13

Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and 4 output contacts (example)

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Landis+Gyr 2-21

Landis+Gyr 2-22

H 71 0200 0136 d en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Description of unit and technical data

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL

Mechanical construction

H 71 0200 0137 c en

Revision history
Index a b c Date 26.07.1999 18.04.2002 01.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Terminals of extension board adapted ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 3-2

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
3 3.1 3.2 3.3 Mechanical construction _____________________________ 3-5 Case ______________________________________________________ 3-5 Connections ________________________________________________ 3-8 Face plate _________________________________________________ 3-10

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 3-3

Landis+Gyr 3-4

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

3
3.1

Mechanical construction
This section describes the mechanical construction of the ZMD300xT meter.

Case
The internal construction of the meters is not described here, since they are protected following calibration and official certification on delivery by a manufacturer and calibration seal. It is not permitted to open the meters after delivery. The front door is only secured with a company seal and can be opened to operate the reset button, to change the battery, to exchange the tariff face plate with connection diagram or to fit or remove a communication unit (see fig. 3.2 and separate user manuals for the communication units available). The following drawing shows the meter components visible from outside.

1 2 3 4 5 8 11

6 7 9 10 12 13 14

16 15 16

Fig. 3.1 Meter ZMD300xT 1 Combined suspension hanger (open or concealed) 2 Screw with manufacturer seal 3 Optical test output reactive energy consumption (red), ZMD300CT only 4 Optical test output active energy consumption (red) 5 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 6 Optical interface 7 Screw with calibration seal 8 Front section with main face plate 9 Display button "up"

10 Display button "down" 11 Front door with tariff face plate 12 Upper part of case 13 14 15 16 Lower part of case Company seal for front door Terminal cover Terminal cover screws with company seals

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Landis+Gyr 3-5

The front door must be opened to give access to the battery compartment, reset button and tariff face plate. To fit or remove the communication unit the terminal cover must also be removed.

1 2 3

Fig. 3.2

Meter with front door open 1 Battery compartment 2 Reset button R 3 Communication unit or dummy

Fig. 3.3

Meter with communication unit withdrawn

If the meter has no communication unit, this is replaced by a dummy case.

Landis+Gyr 3-6

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Seal component

An additional component, which is easy to install, allows the use of a standard padlock instead of an utility seal.

Front door

Seal component inserted Padlock

Fig. 3.4

Front door sealing using a padlock

The seal component is stowed away in a holder under the front door when not in use.

Reset button Battery compartment Compartment for communication unit Seal component Recess for transformer plate

Front door open

Fig. 3.5

Stowage of seal component when not in use

The seal component is installed as follows:


Slide the seal component into the vertical slot at an angle, as shown, (position 1) until it contacts the rear wall. Now turn the seal component until it is horizontal and slide it down into position 2 as illustrated. The two bulges firmly fix the seal component into the lateral grooves.

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Landis+Gyr 3-7

Seal component

insert in position 1
Front door

and turn in position 2


Position 1

Position 2 Side view Front view

Fig. 3.6

Seal component for use with padlock

3.2

Connections

Fig. 3.7

Meter with terminal cover removed (example ZMD300CT)

The terminal block with all meter connections is situated under the terminal cover. Two company seals in the fixing screws of the terminal cover prevent unauthorized access to the phase connections and therefore to unrecorded current consumption.

Landis+Gyr 3-8

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

The top row of terminals (level 1) consists of spring-loaded terminals and Terminal layout (example ZMD300xT) comprises
Extension board terminals on the left depending on version up to 4 control inputs or 6 output contacts or a combination of these with maximum 6 inputs and outputs, voltage connections for a separate supply or test input of the ripple control receiver Communication unit terminals on the right

The center row of terminals (level 0) likewise consists of spring-loaded terminals and comprises
Voltage outputs U1, U2, U3 and N, tapped from the relevant phase input 3 fixed control inputs with a common return line G (electrically isolated) 2 output contacts for transferring fixed valency pulses or control signals (electrically isolated)

The lower row of terminals comprises the phase connections with input and output of the circuit for each phase with the voltage connection in between and neutral conductor at far right.
Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board Pulse inputs Communication interfaces Communication unit

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs

L1

L2

L3

Phase connections

Fig. 3.8

Terminal layout ZMD300xT

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Landis+Gyr 3-9

3.3

Face plate
The face plate is divided into two parts and is designed to customer specifications. It contains all relevant data about the meter.

Main face plate

The main face plate is situated under the plastic viewing window, which is secured by a calibration seal. Recesses permit operation of the display buttons "down" and "up" for control of the liquid crystal display.

3
Landis+Gyr Dialog
Readout

Cl. 1

imp kvarh

1000 kWh

imp

Cl. 1

4 5 6

Three-phase four-wire meter ZMD310CT41.4207 Nr. 73 994 032 10(80) A 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 2000

10 11 12
Fig. 3.9
T1 T2 T3
SET Test

7 8

Main face plate (example ZMD310CT) 1 Optical test output reactive energy (with accuracy class ZMD300CT only) 2 Meter constant R1 (referred to primary values) or R2 3 Optical test output active energy (with accuracy class) 4 Optical interface 5 Approval symbol 6 Type of connection 7 Display button "up" / Display button "down" 8 Symbol for dual protective insulation 9 Meter data (type designation, serial number, rated values, year of construction) 10 Liquid crystal display (LCD) 11 Arrows for present status indication 12 Status indication

The operating elements and displays are described more fully in section 5.

Landis+Gyr 3-10

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Tariff face plate

The tariff face plate is placed in the front door, which can be swung out sideways to the left and is secured by a company seal. The connection diagram of the meter is shown on the back of the face plate and is therefore visible with the front door open.

1 2

8.8... Display check F.F Functional error 0.0 Identification

0.1.0 Reset counter 0.9.1 Time-of-day 0.9.2 Date

C.6.0 Battery hours counter 2:1.8.0 S01 3:1.8.0 S02

73 994 032

+A -A 1.2.0 2.2.0 1.4.0 2.4.0 1.5.0 2.5.0 1.6.0 2.6.0 1.8.T 2.8.T 2.8.0 1.8.0 T = Energy tariff
S01: 1 imp = 10 Wh S02: 1 imp = 10 Wh

+Ri 5.2.0 5.4.0 5.5.0 5.6.0 5.8.T 5.8.0

+Rc 6.2.0 6.4.0 6.5.0 6.6.0 6.8.T 6.8.0

-Ri 7.2.0 7.4.0 7.5.0 7.6.0 7.8.T 7.8.0

-Rc 8.2.0 8.4.0 8.5.0 8.6.0 8.8.T 8.8.0

Pmax cumulated Last tm/P running Plast integr. period Pmax Energy Total energy

3 5

Ownership designation

K1: 1 imp K2: 1 imp K3: 1 imp K4: 1 imp K5: 1 imp K6: 1 imp

= 10 Wh (+A) = 10 Wh (-A) = 10 varh (+Ri) = 10 varh (+Rc) = 10 varh (-Ri) = 10 varh (-Rc)

6
Fig. 3.10 Tariff face plate (example ZMD310CT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 General data appearing in the display Measured quantities Pulse input data Output contact data Ownership designation Communication unit data (if present)

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Landis+Gyr 3-11

Landis+Gyr 3-12

H 71 0200 0137 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Mechanical construction

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

Function

H 71 0200 0021 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 31.03.2003 01.05.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Chapter "VDEW functions" removed. Chapter "Monitoring functions" added. Several changes New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Chapter 4.1 added (H 71 0200 0022 cancelled) Section 4.16 new, section 4.1 integrated (H 71 0200 0022 omitted)

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.1-2

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 4.1.10 4.1.11 4.1.12 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10 4.5 Function ________________________________________ 4.1-7 Overview ________________________________________________ 4.1-7 Block schematic diagram ____________________________________ 4.1-7 Measuring system _________________________________________ 4.1-9 Signal processing _________________________________________ 4.1-10 Signal utilization__________________________________________ 4.1-10 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.1-10 Data preparation for billing _________________________________ 4.1-11 Memory ________________________________________________ 4.1-11 Power supply ____________________________________________ 4.1-11 Supplementary power supply _______________________________ 4.1-11 Extension board __________________________________________ 4.1-11 Communication unit_______________________________________ 4.1-12 Interface board __________________________________________ 4.1-12 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 Formation of measured quantities_____________________________ 4.2-9 Inputs and outputs ________________________________________ 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.3-11 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time base _______________________________________________ 4.4-6 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.4-10 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5
Landis+Gyr 4.1-3

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10
Landis+Gyr 4.1-4

Survey___________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 Tariff control via ripple control receiver _________________________ 4.6-5 Field of application _________________________________________ 4.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure ____________ 4.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.6-12 Tariff control ______________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions _________________________________________ 4.7-7 Activation of control signals __________________________________ 4.7-8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.8-10 Formation of stored values__________________________________ 4.8-10 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data ________________ 4.8-12 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey___________________________________________________ 4.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period __________________ 4.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19
H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.9.11 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.11 4.11.1 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 4.13.3 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 4.14.4 4.14.5 4.14.6 4.14.7 4.15 4.15.1 4.15.2 4.15.3 4.15.4 4.15.5 4.16 4.16.1 4.16.2 4.16.3

Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.9-19 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period________________ 4.10-9 Display and readout______________________________________ 4.10-10 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 Voltage monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.1-5

Landis+Gyr 4.1-6

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Function
The method of operation of the ZMD300 and ZxD400 meters is described in separate documents in sections 4.2 to 4.16 (for document numbers refer to the relevant operating instructions (overall contents list) for the relevant meter).

4.1

Overview
This chapter provides a survey of the function of ZMD300xx und ZxD400xx meters based on a block schematic diagram. ZMD and ZFD meters

Note

The following explanations refer exclusively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters). ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). These are not specially mentioned here. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.

4.1.1

Block schematic diagram


The method of operation of the meters will first be briefly explained with the aid of the block schematic diagram. Individual function blocks are described in the following chapters more fully if necessary for understanding. First some basic differences between the various types of meters: The ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT and ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters differ in their form of communication interfaces (modular or integrated). Two different block schematic diagrams are therefore shown below. Owing to the different kind of connection the current sensors for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters are shunts with series connected voltage transformers, in those of the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters internal current transformers. The ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters record the active energy consumption imported and exported, while the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters record the active and reactive energy consumption in all four quadrants.

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.1-7

ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT

The ZMD300xT direct connection meters and the ZxD400xT transformer connection meters can be fitted with modular communication interfaces in a communication unit, which can be exchanged or used in the field as required.
Reset Calendar clock Time switch Control inputs
Current sensors Voltage dividers A/D

Microprocessor Signal utilization Tariff control

Display buttons

Data for billing

LCD display Optical interface Optical test outputs

Ut

I1 I2 I3 U1 U2 U3 N

Signal processing
Extension board Inputs/outputs RCR (Supplementary power supply)

Output contacts

Measuring system Power supply Voltage monitor Memory, Load profile

Communication unit with interfaces and pulse inputs

Fig. 4.1.1

Block schematic diagram ZMD300xT / ZMD400xT

ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR

The ZMD300xR direct connection meters and the ZxD400xR transformer connection meters can be fitted with a maximum of one integrated communication interface (RS232, RS485 or CS) on the interface board.
Reset Calendar clock Time switch Control inputs
Current sensors Voltage dividers A/D

Microprocessor Signal utilization Tariff control

Display buttons

Data for billing

LCD display Optical interface Optical test outputs

Ut

I1 I2 I3 U1 U2 U3 N

Signal processing
Extension board

Outputcontacts Interface board with RS232, RS485 or CS interface

Measuring system Power supply Voltage monitor Memory, Load profile

Inputs/outputs RCR (Supplementary power supply)

Fig. 4.1.2

Block schematic diagram ZMD300xR / ZMD400xR

Landis+Gyr 4.1-8

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Inputs

The main inputs to the meter are: Connections of phase voltages (U1, U2, U3), phase currents (I1, I2, I3) and neutral conductor N - for processing in the measuring system - for the three-phase power supply to the meter and voltage monitor Control inputs Ut (3 fixed, plus up to 4 others on extension board) for: - Changeover of energy and demand tariffs - Resetting - Demand inhibition - Synchronizing Opto-couplers protect the following circuit from interference, which could otherwise enter via the control inputs. Push buttons - for display control (display buttons, optical interface) - for resetting or service functions (reset button) Pulse inputs for external pulse transmitters (only for ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT group meters in the communication unit)

Outputs

The meter has the following outputs: LCD liquid crystal display with display buttons for local reading of billing data (single 8-digit display with additional information, such as energy direction, type of energy, presence of phase voltages and identification number) Optical test outputs (red, 1 in active energy meters, 2 in combimeters) Static relay with freely parametrized signal assignment (2 fixed, plus up to 6 others on the extension board) Optical interface for automatic local data acquisition by suitable acquisition unit (handheld terminal) Communication interfaces of various kinds (in the communication unit for the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT or on the interface board in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR)

4.1.2

Measuring system
The input circuits (voltage dividers and current shunts with voltage transformer for the ZMD300xx direct connection meters or voltage dividers and current transformers for the ZxD400xx transformer connected meters) record voltage and current in the individual phases. Analogue-digital transformers digitize these values and feed them as instantaneous digital values via calibration stages to a signal processor.

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.1-9

4.1.3

Signal processing
The signal processor determines the following measured quantities from the instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase and forms their mean value over one second: Active power per phase Reactive power per phase (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) Phase voltages Phase currents Mains frequency Phase angles

4.1.4

Signal utilization
For signal utilization in the various registers the microprocessor scans the measured quantities every second to determine the following measured values: Active energy (sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction, if required in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx also assigned to the 4 quadrants) Reactive energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction, assigned to the 4 quadrants) Apparent energy (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, sum and individual phases, separated according to energy direction) Power factors cos (only for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx, individual phases and mean value) Phase voltages Phase currents and neutral current Direction of rotating field

4.1.5

Tariff control
Tariff control is performed: Externally via control inputs (3 fixed, plus up to 4 others on the extension board) Internally by time switch and calendar clock Internally by the ripple control receiver for integration with the extension board By event signals based on threshold values of the monitoring functions

Landis+Gyr 4.1-10

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.1.6

Data preparation for billing


The following registers are available for evaluation of the individual measured values: 24 for energy tariffs 8 for total energy 8 for running mean demand values 24 for demand tariffs 2 for power factors cos (combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only) others for values of voltage and current, mains frequency and phase angles

4.1.7

Memory
A non-volatile flash memory serves to record a load profile and also contains the configuration and parametrization data of the meter and secures the billing data against loss from voltage failures.

4.1.8

Power supply
The supply voltages for the meter electronics are obtained from the threephase network, whereby the phase voltage can vary over the entire voltage range without the supply voltage having to be adjusted. A voltage monitor ensures correct operation and reliable data recovery in the event of a voltage interruption and correct restarting when the voltage is restored.

4.1.9

Supplementary power supply


For medium or high-voltage applications in particular the measuring voltage can be switched off. Since the meter normally obtains its supply from the measuring voltage, it is similarly switched off and cannot be read. The supplementary power supply connected in parallel with the normal power supply ensures operation of the meter free from interruption, so that it can be read at any time. The supplementary power supply is situated on an extension board.

4.1.10

Extension board
The extension board is fitted inside the meter and is therefore secured by the calibration seals. It cannot be exchanged. It can contain the following components: up to 4 control inputs in combination with up to 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) a ripple control receiver a supplementary power supply

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.1-11

4.1.11

Communication unit
The communication unit for fitting only in the ZMD300xT / ZxD400xT meters is a complete unit in its own case. If present, it is situated under the front door, is therefore secured by a company seal and can be exchanged or inserted in the field if necessary. It contains: Communication interfaces as required for remote scanning of the meter (e.g. CS, RS232, RS485, modem) 2 signal inputs (S0 interfaces) for processing external pulse transmitters

4.1.12

Interface board
The interface board only present in the ZMD300xR / ZxD400xR meters is permanently fitted in the meter and therefore secured with the calibration seal. Depending on the version, it contains an RS232 interface, an RS485 interface or a CS interface

Landis+Gyr 4.1-12

H 71 0200 0021 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.2

Measuring unit

H 71 0200 0023 c en

Revision history
Index a b c Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 18.04.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Front page and revision history added Several changes Terminology revision New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.2-2

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal conversion and processing _____________________________ 4.2-7 Formation of measured quantities _____________________________ 4.2-9

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.2-3

Landis+Gyr 4.2-4

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.2

Measuring unit
This sub-chapter explains all functions of the measuring unit in detail, i.e. the generation from the analogue input signals of all digital measured quantities required in the meter. ZMD and ZFD meters

Note

The following explanations refer unless otherwise mentioned exclusively to meters in M circuit for three-phase three-wire networks (ZMD meters). ZFD meters differs from ZMD meters firstly in the number of measuring elements (2 instead of 3) and secondly in the type of measurement (Aron circuit for three-phase three-wire networks). These are not specially mentioned here. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.

4.2.1

Survey
analogue input signals
Ix, Ux

A/D

instantaneous digital values


ix, ux

Signal processor

digital mean values


Ix, Ux, Px, Qx, etc.

Measured quantities Microprocessor

A, R, etc.

Fig. 4.2.1

Block schematic diagram of measuring unit

Input signals Signal conversion

The meter has the analogue current values I1, I2 and I3 and analogue voltage values U1, U2 and U3 available as input signals. The meter measuring system generates calibrated instantaneous digital values of voltage and current for each phase from the analogue input signals. The signal processor of the meter determines the following digital mean values (averaged for one second in each case) from the instantaneous values of voltage and current in each phase: Active powers P1, P2 and P3 (with sign for direction of energy) Reactive powers Q1, Q2 and Q3 (with sign for direction of energy, only in combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx) Phase voltages U1, U2, U3 Phase currents I1, I2, I3, neutral current I0 Phase angles between voltages U1 and U2 as well as U1 and U3 Phase angles between voltage U1 and currents I1, I2 and I3 Mains frequency fn

Signal preparation

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.2-5

Signal processing
Measured quantity Active power import Active power export Reactive power positive Reactive power negative

The microprocessor calculates the following measured quantities from the mean values provided by the signal processor:
ZMD300Cx ZMD400Cx +A A +R R +Ri Rc Ri +Rc +VA VA cos Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Sum / Phases Phases / mean value U1 - U2 - U3 I1 - I2 - I3 I0 fn U U-I yes U1 - U2 / U1 - U3 yes yes ZFD400Cx Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Sum Mean value U12 - U32 I1 - I3 yes yes ZMD300Ax ZMD400Ax Sum / Phases Sum / Phases U1 - U2 - U3 I1 - I2 - I3 I0 yes U1 - U2 / U1 - U3 yes yes ZFD400Ax Sum Sum U12 - U32 I1 - I3 yes yes

Reactive power 1st quadrant Reactive power 2nd quadrant Reactive power 3rd quadrant Reactive power 4th quadrant Apparent power import Apparent power export Power factor Phase voltages Phase currents Neutral current Mains frequency Phase angle voltages Phase angle voltage-current Direction of rotating field

Owing to the different type of measurement of the Aron circuit, data for the individual phases in the ZFD400xx are specifically not provided. The following diagrams show the differences between the ZMD400xx and the ZFD400xx. ZMD400xx
L1

U1

I1
L1 L2 L3 N

I3 U3
L3

I2

U2
L2

Fig. 4.2.2

Type of measurement ZMD400xx

Since the ZMD400xx measures the individual phases mutually independently with one measuring element each, it can record the sum of the three phases, the individual phases themselves, the phase angle between voltage and current as well as the angle between voltages U1 - U2 and U1 - U3.

Landis+Gyr 4.2-6

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

ZFD400xx

cos = 1
L1 L2 L3

L1

U12 I1

L3

U32

L2

I3

Fig. 4.2.3

Type of measurement ZFD400xx

The ZFD400xx with Aron circuit records with its two measuring elements a phase current I1 or I3 each, together with the corresponding linked voltage U12 or U32. It cannot therefore form any actual single-phase values. In addition, the phase angles between voltage and current always have an additional angle of 30 and are therefore not representative. No version ZFD300xx is provided for three-phase three-wire networks.

4.2.2

Signal conversion and processing


Ix A/D Converter Digital filter Calibration i

I2
Formation of mean values per second

Ix digital values Ux

analogue input signals Ux

u, i : calibrated instantaneous values of voltage and current

U2 p = u. i q = u*. i

A/D Converter

Digital filter

Calibration u

Px

p : instantaneous active power q : instantaneous reactive power u* : voltage displaced 90 tn : zero passage times
o

(Qx) U U-I fn

tn

Fig. 4.2.4

Principle of signal processor

There is no calculation of reactive power Q by the ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax active energy meters. Input circuits High resistance voltage dividers reduce the voltages U1, U2 and U3 (58 to 240 V) applied to the meter to a proportionate amount of a few mV (UU) for further processing. In the ZMD300xx meters for direct connection the phase currents pass through a high precision resistor in the current loop. The following voltage transformer forms voltages proportional to the input currents likewise of several mV (UI) and simultaneously separates the measuring circuit from the meter electronics. This voltage transformer is also insensitive to direct currents up to 100 A. In the ZxD400xx meters for transformer connection internal current transformers reduce the input currents I1, I2 and I3 to the meter (0 to 10 A) for further processing. The secondary currents of these current transformers develop voltages proportional to the input currents across resistors, also of a few mV (UI).
H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.2-7

Digitizing

The analogue signals UU and UI are digitized in analogue-digital converters and then filtered. A following calibration stage compensates for the natural errors of the voltage divider or current transformer, so that no further adjustment is necessary in the subsequent processing. Calibrated digital instantaneous values of voltage (u) and current (i) for all three phases are then available as intermediate values for the formation of the required values in the signal processor.

Power calculation

The instantaneous value of active power p is produced by multiplying the instantaneous values of voltage u and current i (the active component corresponds to the product of voltage component with the current component parallel to the voltage).
IQ I Calculation per phase of

IP U

P = U . I . cos Q = U . I . sin

Fig. 4.2.5

Power calculation

For the instantaneous value of reactive power q (only formed by the ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx combimeters) the instantaneous value of voltage u must be rotated through 90 before multiplication (the reactive component is the product of the voltage component with the current component vertical to the voltage). The squares of voltage and current are obtained by multiplying the instantaneous values of voltage and current by themselves. The values U and I are obtained from these by extracting the root. Time measurement The mains frequency can be calculated from the time measured between two zero passages (change from negative to positive value of voltage U1). The times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the other phase voltages U2 and U3 serves to determine the phase angle between the voltages and of the rotating field.
U1 U2 U3 Time measurement for rotating field, frequency, phase angle 1 : TU1-U2 2 : TU1-U3
1 2 3

3 : TU1-U1 (fn)

Fig. 4.2.6

Time measurement

The phase angle between voltage and current is determined by the times between zero passage of the phase voltage U1 and those of the phase currents I1, I2 and I3. Mean value formation The signal processor works at a high clock frequency in the kHz range. For further processing of the individual signal it generates mean values over one second, which the following microprocessor scans at intervals of one second.

Landis+Gyr 4.2-8

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.2.3

Formation of measured quantities


By scanning the mean values of active P and in combimeters also reactive Q powers every second, energy components are produced (Ws or vars) at fixed intervals (every second) and with varying energy magnitudes or demand. These energy components are scaled by the microprocessor corresponding to the meter constant and are then available as measured quantities for selection of measured value. The measured values are fed directly to the following registers to record the energy and the maximum demand (in combimeters also of minimum power factor).

Active power

The active powers in the individual phases A1, A2 and A3 are formed directly from the mean values of active power P1, P2 and P3. By summating the mean values of active power P1, P2 and P3 the microprocessor calculates the total active power import +A or the total active power export -A.
Mean values per second
P1 P2 P3

Measured quantities

Total active power

+A (Import) -A (Export)

Fig. 4.2.7

Reactive power

The reactive power values of the individual phases R1, R2 and R3 are obtained in the combimeters directly from the mean values of reactive power Q1, Q2 and Q3. By summating the mean values of reactive power Q1, Q2 and Q3, the microprocessor calculates the total positive reactive power +R or the total negative reactive power -R.
Mean values per second
Q1 Q2 Q3

Measured quantities

+R -R

Fig. 4.2.8

Total reactive power

The microprocessor can allocate the reactive power to the 4 quadrants in the combimeters from the signs of R and A: Reactive power in 1st quadrant: +Ri Reactive power in 2nd quadrant: +Rc Reactive power in 3rd quadrant: -Ri Reactive power in 4th quadrant: -Rc In the same way he can allocate the reactive powers of the individual phases to the 4 quadrants.

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.2-9

+R

+ kvarh

+Rc Quadrant II

+Ri Quadrant I

+ kvarh

Export - kWh

-A
Quadrant III -Ri

+A
Quadrant IV -Rc
- kvarh

Import + kWh

- kvarh

-R

Fig. 4.2.9

4-quadrant measurement

The quadrants are numbered from top right as 1st quadrant (+A/+Ri) anticlockwise to the 4th quadrant (+A/-Rc) at bottom right. Apparent power The apparent power is calculated in the combimeters in two ways: by geometric addition of the active and reactive power of the individual phases by multiplying the rms values of voltage and current of the individual phases The method of calculation can be parametrized (only one possible in each case). Calculation method 1 (vectorial addition) From the mean values P1, P2 and P3 and Q1, Q2 and Q3 the microprocessor calculates the apparent power of the individual phases VA1, VA2 and VA3 as well as the total apparent power VA.
Mean values per second
P1 P2 P3 Q1 Q2 Q3

Measured quantities

(P1 + P2 + P3) +VA (import) -VA (export)

(P1 + P2 + P3) + (Q1 + Q2 + Q3)

(Q1 + Q2 + Q3)

Fig. 4.2.10 Total apparent power according to calculation type 1

Landis+Gyr 4.2-10

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Calculation method 2 (from rms values)

From the mean values U1rms, U2rms, U3rms and I1rms, I2rms, I3rms the microprocessor calculates by multiplication the apparent power of the individual phases VA1, VA2 and VA3 and summates these for the total apparent power VA.
Mean values per second
I1 rms U1rms I2 rms U2 rms I3rms U3 rms I3rms. U3rms VA3 I2rms. U2 rms VA2

Measured quantities
VA1

. I1rms U1 rms

+VA (Import)

VA (Export)

Fig. 4.2.11 Total apparent power according to calculation type 2 (ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx only)

Power factor cos

The power factor cos is calculated bei den Kombizhlern as follows:

cos =

P S

The meter uses the method of calculation employed for calculating the apparent power. Phase voltages The rms values of the voltages U1rms, U2rms and U3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the voltages by extracting the root and directly from these the phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. The rms values of the currents I1rms, I2rms and I3rms are obtained from the mean values of the squares of the currents by extracting the root and directly from these the phase currents I1, I2 and I3. The signal processor calculates the instantaneous neutral current i0 by adding the instantaneous phase currents i1, i2 and i3.

Phase currents

Neutral current

i1 i3 i0

i2

i0 = i1 + i2 + i3 (geometrical addition)

Fig. 4.2.12 Neutral current I0

Mains frequency

The signal processor calculates the mains frequency fn by forming the reciprocal from the time tU1-U1 between two zero passages of voltage U1.

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.2-11

Phase angles

The signal processor calculates the phase angles between voltages U1-U2 and U1-U3 from the times tU1-U1, tU1-U2 and tU1-U3 between zero passages of the various voltages. The signal processor calculates the phase angle between voltage U1 and current per phase from the times tU1-I1, tU1-I2 and tU1-I3 between zero passages of the voltage U1 and the phase currents. 2 forms of representation are available for displaying the phase angle. These can be selected by parametrizing. Case 1: All voltage and current angles are displayed clockwise with reference to the voltage in phase 1. The values of the angles are always positive and can be from 0 to 360.
U3 I3

U3 (240)

I3

U1 I2 U2
Fig. 4.2.13 Phase angle case 1
I2 U2 (120) I1

I1

Case 2: The voltage angles are displayed as in case 1. The angles of the currents are displayed, however, with reference to the associated phase voltage and can have values between -180 and +180.
U3 I3

U3-I3 U3 (240)

U1
U1-I1

I2

U2-I2

I1
U2 (120)

U2
Fig. 4.2.14 Phase angle case 2

Direction of rotating field

The direction of the rotating field is calculated by the microprocessor based on the phase angle of the 3 voltages. If the direction of rotation corresponds to that specified by the parametrizing, the phase voltage indications L1, L2 and L3 are continuously lit. Otherwise they flash every second.

Landis+Gyr 4.2-12

H 71 0200 0023 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.3

Inputs and outputs

H 71 0200 0036 f en

Revision history
Index a b c d e f Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 18.04.2002 22.04.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Several changes ZxD210AT replaced with ZxD410AT; extension board 600x with 6 control inputs cancelled Chapter 6.5 additionally ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.3-2

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 Inputs and outputs_________________________________________ 4.3-5 Terminal layout ___________________________________________ 4.3-5 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Further inputs and outputs _________________________________ 4.3-11

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.3-3

Landis+Gyr 4.3-4

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.3

Inputs and outputs


This sub-chapter describes all inputs and outputs of ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx meters and provides instructions for the definition of terminal functions and terminal labelling.

4.3.1

Terminal layout
The terminals are arranged as shown as seen from below in the various types of meter. The functions of the terminals are likewise shown on the drawings.

ZMD300xT

Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x)

Communication unit (Terminals T2-x) Pulse Communication inputs interfaces

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x)

L1

L2

L3

Phase connections

Fig. 4.3.1

Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xT meter for direct connection with modular communication (exchangeable communication unit, example CU-A1)

ZMD300xR

Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x)

Interface board (Terminals T2-x) Communication interface

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x)

L1

L2

L3

Phase connections

Fig. 4.3.2

Terminal arrangement for ZMD300xR meter for direct connection with permanently integrated communication (interface board)

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.3-5

ZxD400xT

Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x)

Communication unit (Terminals T2-x) Pulse Communication inputs interfaces

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) N Voltage connections Current connections

I1

U1

I1 I2

U2

I2 I3

U3

I3

Fig. 4.3.3

Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xT meter for transformer connection with modular communication (exchangeable communication unit)

ZxD400xR

Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board (Terminals T1-x)

Interface board (Terminals T2-x) Communication interface

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs (Terminals T0-x) N Voltage connections Current connections

I1

U1

I1 I2

U2

I2 I3

U3

I3

Fig. 4.3.4

Terminal arrangement for ZMD400xR meter for transformer connection with permanently integrated communication (interface board)

4.3.2

Parametrizing the terminal designations


Definitions for the terminal designations are required for all terminals available in the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software, i.e. a terminal number must be defined for every terminal, which is then printed at the relevant terminal during the equipment manufacturing process. In the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parametrizing software the terminals are provided with the following symbolic designation: T0-1 to T0-n T1-1 to T1-n for terminals of the basic version for terminals of the extension board
H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.3-6

T2-1 to T2-n

for terminals of the communication unit or interface board

These symbolic designations must be supplemented when parametrized, where permitted, with the relevant terminal designations required by the customer. Terminal designations are always numerical with a maximum of 2 digits. Standardization The table below shows typical terminal designations for the input terminals as used according to VDEW/DIN or selected by Landis+Gyr.
Function Common connection Energy tariff input Energy tariff input Energy tariff input Integration period control G E1 E2 E3 mB Landis+Gyr 40 41 42 49 45 50 43 44 20 21 22 23 46 47 48 VDEW / DIN 15 13 33 not defined 17 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 14 34 not defined

Time-of-day synchronization Synch 15 Reset control Reset control S0-input S0-input S0-input S0-input Demand tariff input Demand tariff input Demand tariff input KA KB S0 1+ S0 1S0 2+ S0 2P1 P2 P3

There is no standardization for the assignment and designation of the output contacts.

4.3.3

Terminal designations
It should be noted for the current and voltage connections that terminal designations for the actual connection terminals for current and voltage (numbers 1 - 11) are engraved on the terminal block and cannot be altered. Individual terminal designations are possible exclusively for the screwless spring-loaded terminals. In the following connection diagrams the terminals for which the designations can be changed are shaded.

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.3-7

ZFD400xx

T0 T0 -1 -2 1 2 3 5

T0 -3 7 8

T0 -4 9

T0 T0 -5 -6

Fig. 4.3.5

Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZFD400xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 9 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6

ZMD400xx

T0 T0 -1 -2 1 2 3 4 5

T0 -3 6 7 8

T0 -4 9 11

T0 T0 -5 -6

Fig. 4.3.6

Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD400xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1 to 11 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6

ZMD300xx

T0 T0 -1 -2 1 3 4

T0 -3 6 7

T0 -4 9 10

T0 T0 -5 -6 12

Fig. 4.3.7

Connection diagram of measuring unit for ZMD300xx with unchangeable terminal designations 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 12 and the changeable terminal designations T0-1 to T0-6

Landis+Gyr 4.3-8

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

K1

K2

Basic version: 3 control inputs

G E1 P1 mB T0 T0 T0 T0 -7 -8 -9 -10 T0 T0 T0 -11 -12 -13

2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

Fig. 4.3.8

Example of a connection diagram for control inputs and output contacts of basic version
K3 K4

4200

Extension board 4200 4 control inputs

KA KB

G E2 P2 T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10

2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4

Fig. 4.3.9

Example of a connection diagram for the 4200 extension board


K3 K4 K5 K6

2400

Extension board 2400 2 control inputs


G KA KB T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7 T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10

4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4

Fig. 4.3.10 Example of a connection diagram for the 2400 extension board

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.3-9

0600

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

Extension board 0600 No control inputs 6 output contacts (solid-state relays)

T1 T1 T1 T1 -1 -2 -3 -4

T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7

T1 T1 T1 -8 -9 -10

Signal allocation for free parametrization

Fig. 4.3.11 Example of a connection diagram for the 0600 extension board

0250

K3

K4

Extension board 0250 With supplementary power supply No control inputs 2 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

T1 T1 -1 -2

T1 T1 -3 -4

T1 T1 T1 -5 -6 -7

Fig. 4.3.12 Example of a connection diagram for the 0250 extension board

0030

Extension board 0030 With ripple control receiver No control inputs No output contacts

T1 -1

Signal allocation for free parametrization

Fig. 4.3.13 Example of a connection diagram for the 0030 extension board

0430
E

K3

K4

K5

K6

Extension board 0430 With ripple control receiver No control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

T1 -1

T1 -2

T1 T1 T1 -3 -4 -5

T1 T1 T1 -6 -7 -8

Fig. 4.3.14 Example of a connection diagram for the 0430 extension board

Landis+Gyr 4.3-10

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

CU-xx

DC

DC

DC
+

DC RS232

Communication unit CU-A1 CS


+ -

2 pulse inputs (S0 interface) RS232 and CS interface for remote meter reading

TD

GND RD GND

T2 T2 T2 T2 -1 -2 -3 -4 S01 S02

4 T2-5

T2-6

Fig. 4.3.15 Connection diagram of a communication unit (example CU-A1)

c1, c2 c3

The interface boards c1 (RS232) and c2 (RS484) are permanently labelled on the plug. No terminal designation must be parametrized.
CS
+ -

Interface board c3
CS interface for remote meter reading

T2 T2 -3 -4

Fig. 4.3.16 Connection diagram of interface board c3

4.3.4

Further inputs and outputs


Further meter inputs and outputs are the optical interface (see 6 "Communication interfaces") and the optical test outputs (see 5 "Control elements and displays" and 8 "Maintenance and service)".

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.3-11

Landis+Gyr 4.3-12

H 71 0200 0036 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.4

Calendar clock

H 71 0200 0243 - en

Revision history
Index Date 31.03.2003 Comments First edition

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.4-2

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10 Calendar clock ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Summer/winter time _______________________________________ 4.4-5 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time base________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Power reserve ____________________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing the date and time _________________________________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal______________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.4-10

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.4-3

Landis+Gyr 4.4-4

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.4

Calendar clock
This sub-chapter explains the functions of the calendar clock.

4.4.1

Survey
The meters ZMD300xxx / ZxD400xx are always fitted with a calendar clock (Time of Use). The tariff sections T24 and T44 are also fitted with a time switch, which uses the calendar clock as a time-base and performs the tariff control with the associated switching tables (see chapter 4.5 "Time switch").

Calendar clock

Mains frequency 50/60 Hz Synchronizing input SYNC Quartz

Integrating period synchronous integrating period

Internal integrating period

Internal reset Date and time for Pmax, resets, control of time switch, etc.

Fig. 4.4.1

Block schematic diagram for calendar clock

The calendar clock has the following functions: Formation of date and time (can be synchronized by external SYNC control signal) from internal quartz oscillator (can be synchronized with mains frequency) Formation of integrating period (1 to 60 minutes) likewise from internal quartz (can be synchronized with time-of-day) Resetting if controlled internally Provision of date and time for various events

4.4.2

Summer/winter time
The start and finish of a summer season can be defined with freely parametrized times. The time shift can be 120 minutes.

4.4.3

Time elements
The time function provides the following time elements (range in parentheses): Year Month Calendar days Weekdays Hours Minutes Seconds (0000 ... 9999) (01 ... 12) (01 ... 31) (1 ... 7, where 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.) (00 ... 23) (00 ... 59) (00 ... 59)

The calendar clock takes account of leap years until 2100.


H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.4-5

4.4.4

Time base
The internal quartz oscillator, which with < 0.5 second deviation per day (< 5 ppm) is of very high accuracy, serves as time-base. Its temperature stability of < 0.1 s per K is also very high. The quartz frequency can be tuned to the mains frequency of 50 or 60 Hz if necessary, provided this is sufficiently accurate. Tuning is performed after every full wave of the mains frequency, i.e. after 20 ms at 50 Hz or after 16.67 ms at 60 Hz. The meter monitors the fluctuation of the mains frequency from the quartz frequency. If this is greater than 5 %, it automatically switches off the tuning of the quartz frequency to the mains frequency.

4.4.5

Power reserve
With an interruption in the voltage, Supercaps (capacitors of very high capacitance) ensure that the calendar clock continues for a few days. The power supply company can use a battery in the meter as a supply during longer interruptions. The power reserve is at least 15 days without battery and around 10 years with battery. When the power reserve expires the date is set to 1.1.2000 an error message is given Depending on the parametrizing the expired power reserve is indicated by a flashing arrow on the display.

4.4.6

Changing the date and time


The date and time of the calendar clock can be changed as follows: manually in setting mode, called up via the service menu via the communication interfaces via the integrated ripple control receiver via the control inputs

4.4.7

Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal


The calendar clock can be synchronized by an external master clock (e.g. the central station), which sends synchronization pulses at regular intervals. This is of particular importance if the meter is to record load profiles. There are two possibilities of synchronizing the calendar clock using the external synchronization pulses: Several times per day Once per day Selected application of method of synchronizing

Note

Only one type of synchronization can be used at a time, either several times per day or once per day.
H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.4-6

Several times per day

Two synchronizing intervals are available: the integrating period or full minutes. In the first case, synchronizing takes place at the start of the next or end of the last integrating period, in the second case on the full minute. The synchronization interval is defined by parameter setting.
Synchronization interval e.g. 15 min >2s

< 100 ms bounce-free

Fig. 4.4.2

Synchronization interval

Since the synchronization signal is transmitted at regular intervals (e.g. 00:00h, 00:15h, 00:30h etc) it carries a time information. When, for instance, the meter receives the third synchronization signal of the day (00:30h) the calendar clock is synchronized to 00:30h. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the detected deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations"). The meter will accept the synchronization pulse any time but only once within one capture period. It is therefore recommended to set the synchronization interval identical to the capture period. Ignoring synchronization pulses

Note

A second synchronization pulse within the same integrating period will be ignored. With the daily synchronization, the meter allows one time window per day within which the synchronization pulse must be sent to the meter. The time of the day (e.g. 22:00h) and the width (e.g. one minute) of the window can be defined by parameter setting.
Daily synchronization time window

Once per day

00:00 Uhr

24:00 Uhr Daily synchronization pulse

Fig. 4.4.3

Synchronization time window

If the "time of the day" parameter is set to 22:00h and the meter receives a synchronization signal within the defined window, the meter is synchronized to 22:00h. The reaction of the meter to the synchronization signal depends on the deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations"). The meter will not accept a synchronization pulse outside the time window and the signal will therefore have no effect.

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.4-7

4.4.8

Synchronizing via communication interface


The calendar clock can be synchronized by the central station, which sends the time information to the meter via the selected communication interface. The time information received from the central station is compared with the local time of the meter. The reaction of the meter to the time information depends on the deviation (see 4.4.9 "Meter behaviour with time deviations"). The time can be set as often as required but only once per integrating period. Setting time and new start of integrating period

Note

If the time is synchronized a second time within the same integrating period, the integrating period is reset no matter how small the deviation. This is to prevent multiple synchronization with a small time shift resulting in a large time shift that, if made in one single approach, would have reset the integrating period.

4.4.9

Meter behaviour with time deviations


Depending on the time deviation of the internal clock from the external master clock, the synchronization has different effects on the calendar clock. The following cases are possible: the time deviation is smaller than 1 second the time deviation is between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds (depending on parameter setting) the time deviation is greater than 2 to 9 seconds (depending on parameter setting)
no effect time shift integrating period reset

0s

1s

2...9 s

Time deviation

Fig. 4.4.4

Meter behaviour with time deviations

Smaller than 1 second Between 1 second and 2 to 9 seconds

If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is smaller than one second, no correction is made to the time. The deviation is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second. If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is between one second and a maximum of nine seconds, the time is advanced or set back by the corresponding number of seconds. Advancing or setting back the clock is only allowed once per capture period. The remaining deviation (fraction of a second) is cumulated and will be corrected as soon as it exceeds one second. The integrating period is shortened or elongated by the number of seconds of the time shift.

Landis+Gyr 4.4-8

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Greater than 2 to 9 seconds

If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is greater than 2 to 9 seconds, the time for the calendar clock is set to the time transmitted by the master clock. A time setting always causes interruption of the present integrating period and the start of a new period. A reduced integrating period therefore results when setting the time on the integrating period grid. When setting to a time within the integrating period (possible with synchronizing signal to the full minute or with synchronization via the communication unit) two reduced integrating periods are produced. Load profile entries for reduced integrating periods are identified by a corresponding status entry and declared invalid. In the example below, the synchronization interval and the integrating period has been set to 15 minutes. If, for instance, the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 22 minutes past the hour, the clock is set back to 15 minutes past the hour i.e. to the start time of the integrating period. The aborted integrating period is declared as invalid and a new integrating period will immediately be initiated i.e. 15 minutes past the hour.
07 :3 0 to ..: fro m
..:30:00 ..:29:59

Example

fro
..:14:59 ..:15:00

..:45:00 ..:44:59

..: 37 ..: :3 37 1 :3 0

m to ..: 22 0 :3 ..: 22 1 :3

fro

Fig. 4.4.5

to

Meter behaviour dependent on time of arrival of synchronizing pulse

If the meter receives the synchronization pulse at 23 minutes past the hour, the clock is advanced to 29 minutes and 59 seconds past the hour i.e. to the end of the capture period. The remaining second of the capture period is used to communicate and save all relevant data. The aborted (shortened) capture period is declared as invalid and a new capture period will be initiated at 30 minutes past the hour.

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

..: 07

:3 1

..:59:59 ..:00:00

fro m 1 :3 52 0 ..: :3 52 ..: to

Landis+Gyr 4.4-9

4.4.10

Display and readout


The following calendar clock values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: current time-of-day current date day of week status of calendar clock (only readable with DLMS)

Values available

Display examples

Some examples are given below of calendar clock displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
current time-of-day (1) 0: general data 9: time data current date (2) 11 May 2000

Landis+Gyr 4.4-10

H 71 0200 0243 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.5

Time switch

H 71 0200 0029 c en

Revision history
Index a b c Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 4 to 7 New designation of time switch signals. Displays updated. New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.5-2

H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7

H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.5-3

Landis+Gyr 4.5-4

H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.5

Time switch
This sub-chapter explains the functions of the time switch.

4.5.1

Survey
The time switch permits autonomous tariff control of the meter. It uses the calendar clock (see chapter 4.4) as time base and with the current day table at the desired time controls the tariff changeover (energy and demand tariffs) a maximum of 8 output relays suppression or release of event signals The time switch is only fitted in meters with tariff section T24 or T44.

Day tables

With every change of date, i.e. at midnight, the time switch determines with the aid of various tables which day table is valid for the next day (see 4.5.2). The power supply company can define up to 8 different day tables and therefore determine the required tariff structure for the relevant type of day. Each day table contains the following information: Number of table (1 to 8) Max. 10 time inputs (time-of-day in hours and minutes) with status data ("1" for active, "0" for inactive) for the 16 time switch signals. The signal statuses entered apply in each case from midnight to midnight between the specified times-of-day.

Day table No. X


TOU-E1 TOU-E4 TOU-P1 TOU-E3 TOU-E5 TOU-E2 TOU-E6 TOU-P2 TOU-P3 TOU-P4 TOU-P5

Time switch signals TOU-K1 TOU-K2 TOU-K3 TOU-Sp TOU-P6 valid from: 00:00 to:

Fig. 4.5.1

Day table

The 16 time switch have specific designations. Their assignment to the functions is basically free, but the following assignments are recommended: TOU-E1 to TOU-E6 for energy registers ERx, with parallel control also for demand registers TOU-P1 to TOU-P6 for demand registers MDRx, if independent of the energy registers and with demand inhibition B TOU-K1 to TOU-K3 for passing on control signals to external devices via output contacts TOU-Sp(ecial) for a control signal independent of the remaining control signals also for passing on to external devices
H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.5-5

The control signals generated corresponding to the day table effective can either be linked to control signals CS1 to CS16 via the AND and OR matrix or used directly as control signals (see 4.7 "Tariff control"). They can also be fed out via relays to external devices.

4.5.2

Determination of the valid day table


The day table effective on a specific date is defined in the time switch with the aid of two further control tables: The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for a maximum of 12 time periods. The exception days table defines day tables deviating from the normal sequence, e.g. bank holidays, vacation, etc. The exception day table can contain up to 100 entries.
Calendar clock Time/date no exception day Exception days table
Day table valid at valid
from to

up to 8 day tables

Season table
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su

Day table No. 1 Time switch signals


TOU-E1 TOU-E2 TOU-E3 etc. to TOU-Sp

valid
from to

up to 100 entries

up to 12 entries

up to 10 entries

Exception day

Tariff control / control table

Fig. 4.5.2

Sequence to determine day table effective

Following every change of date, the date is compared with the entries in the exception days table. If the date is included in the table, it is an exception day and the day table specified is used for the control. Otherwise the season table is checked in order to determine the valid day table. Season table The season table defines the day table effective in each case for each day from Monday to Sunday for up to 12 date periods. The power supply company can therefore take account of seasonal variations for the tariff control. The season table contains no year figure and is therefore run through repetitively. In the very simplest case the season table contains a single entry with starting date 1.1. and end date 31.12., which is therefore valid for the whole year. Every entry in the season table defines the day table effective in each case from Monday to Sunday for the corresponding time period. In the simplest case the season table contains the same day table number for every weekday and which is therefore valid for the whole week.

Landis+Gyr 4.5-6

H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

The power supply company can also specify different day tables for the individual weekdays (differing day tables for weekdays and the weekend are often encountered). Exception days table All day dates are recorded in the exception days table on which a different control program should be used from normal operation, together with the number of the day table then effective. If the exception day has the same date every year, e.g. the Swiss national holiday on 1 August, only the day and month have to be entered in the exception days table. The entry is then valid for an indefinite time. If the exception day has a different date every year, however, such as Easter, a separate entry is necessary for every year. The year must also be entered in addition to the day and month. The table can therefore cover a long period of time.

4.5.3

Changeover to a new switching program


The power supply company can parametrize a second switching program in the meter (passive switching table) with identification number and changeover date, on which the season and day tables of the previous switching program can be overwritten with the data of new tables (the exception days table remains effective unchanged).
Calendar clock Time/date Exception days table
Day table Date

Changeover date no exception day Season table


valid from ... to

Day Month Year

Season table new


valid from ... to Mo to Su Day table

Mo to Su Day table

Day table 1 to 8 new Time switch signals


TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time

Exception day

Day table 1 to 8 Time switch signals


TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time

Tariff control / control table

Fig. 4.5.3

Before changeover to a new switching program

This permits the power supply company to fit all meters installed with a new switching program before this changeover date, which is applicable to all meters simultaneously from this date. The time switch operates with the previous switching table until the specified changeover date. The new switching table becomes effective with change of date to the specified changeover date. The previous switching program is then irrevocably overwritten and is no longer available. Every switching table can be given an identification number to identify it clearly. The identification number can be displayed and read out. In addition, the changeover date on the new switching table and the date on which the currently active switching table was activated can be displayed and read out.
H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.5-7

Calendar clock Time/date no exception day Exception days table


Day table Date

Season table new


valid from ... to Mo to Su Day table

Exception day

Day table1 to 8 new Time switch signals


TOU-E1 to TOU-Sp Time

Tariff control / control table

Fig. 4.5.4

Following changeover to a new switching program

The changeover date and the table contents stored temporarily until the changeover are deleted after the changeover. At a later date the power supply company can again set a table structure with the corresponding changeover date, from which the time switch is to use these tables instead of the previous versions.

Landis+Gyr 4.5-8

H 71 0200 0029 c en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.6

Ripple control receiver

H 71 0200 0030 b en

Revision history
Index a b Date 09.07.2002 31.03.2003 17.09.2003 Comments First edition New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 C.3.1 instead of C.3.2 for status display

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.6-2

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-5 Field of application_________________________________________ 4.6-5 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 Functional description of ripple control receiver __________________ 4.6-6 Test key of ripple control receiver_____________________________ 4.6-9 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.6-11 Connection diagrams ______________________________________ 4.6-11 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.6-12

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.6-3

Landis+Gyr 4.6-4

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.6

Tariff control via ripple control receiver


This sub-chapter includes all relevant details concerning the ripple control receiver on the extension board, which largely corresponds with the standalone version RCR161. For further information about the RCR161 ripple control receiver, reference is made to the relevant documents, in particular H1 2320 1570 en.

4.6.1

Field of application
The ripple control receiver can be used with the ZMD300xx and ZMD400xx meters with an 0030 or 0430 extension board. No ripple control receiver is supported for meters in three-phase three-wire networks (F-circuit).

4.6.2

Functional principle of ripple control systems


Ripple control systems are used for tariff and load control in electrical power supply networks. The ripple control signals required for this purpose are transmitted via the power supply network. The power supply company feeds audio frequency signals from 110 to 2000 Hz from transmitters to the power supply network to one central or several decentralized network stations. These ripple control signals are superimposed on the mains voltage with an amplitude of a few percent of the relevant rated mains voltage. The audio frequency is switched on and off to transmit according to a specific pulse pattern to produce a "pulse telegram". The ripple control receivers on the consumer side filter these audio frequency signals from the mains voltage and evaluate the pulse telegrams to control tariffs or to switch loads on or off. Electronic ripple control receivers for tariff and load control are standardized according to EN 61037.

Pulse telegrams

The various manufacturers of ripple control systems have specified different types of pulse telegrams, which differ with respect to mark and space lengths as well as number of data pulses, viz.: Semagyr (Landis+Gyr) Ricontic (ABB) Decabit (Zellweger) Details of the individual types of pulse telegrams are of no interest here, since the ripple control receiver integrated on the extension board can be used with practically all ripple control systems by parametrizing.

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.6-5

4.6.3

Functional description of ripple control receiver


The ripple control receiver (RCR) is integrated on an optional extension board in the meter. Two types of extension boards are fitted with this: 0030: extension board with ripple control receiver, without control inputs, without output contacts and without load profile 0430: extension board with ripple control receiver, without control inputs, with 4 output contacts The functions of the ripple control receiver on the extension board correspond to those of the Landis & Gyr RCR161 stand-alone ripple control receiver. More detailed information can be found in the corresponding functional description H1 2320 1570 en. The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains A pre-filter to remove the fundamental frequency (50 Hz) and trigger the power up and power down function. A circuit to generate the network clock signal from the mains frequency. A microprocessor with digital audio frequency filter, which evaluates the pulse telegrams received and forms the internal signals RCR1 to RCR6 for tariff control. The control signals CS1 to CS16 are produced in the control table from these signals (see 4.7 "Tariff control"). A 7-day clock (with time-of-day, weekday, holidays, but without date) with switching functions. A non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to save the parameter data of the ripple control receiver. A test key.

Ripple control receiver RCR


RPT01 Parametrization software Optical Interface Test key Phase voltage 230 V or 58 V Pre-filter Pulse telegram RCR microprocessor RCR1 to RCR6 Communication bus EEPROM memory

Network clock generation

Network clock 7-day clock

Fig. 4.6.1

Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver

Landis+Gyr 4.6-6

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Input signal

The audio frequency signal superimposed on the mains voltage is fed single-phase to the ripple control receiver. Connection is made externally via a terminal. The ripple control receiver can be designed for a mains voltage of 58 V or 230 V. The earth connection is made internally from the meter. The behaviour of the ripple control receiver in the event of a mains failure is described in chapter 4.6.4. The ripple control receiver on the extension board contains a digital audio frequency filter with long-term stability integrated in the microprocessor, of which the centre frequency, level and bandwidth can be parametrized corresponding to the ripple control system used by the power supply company. Typical filter values lie in the following ranges: Centre frequency (rated control frequency) = 110 to 2000 Hz Level (rated function voltage) = 0.3 to 2.5 % of mains rated voltage Bandwidth = 0.6 to 6 % of rated control frequency The choice of rated control frequency (audio frequency) is highly dependent on the power distribution network. For extensive networks with several voltage levels lower frequencies (below 250 Hz) are generally recommended, for networks of less extent higher frequencies. The feed levels required are also dependent on the power supply network. The greater the extent, the higher the selected level, so that the ripple control receivers farthest from the feed point can also still reliably receive the pulse telegrams. Narrow bandwidths are selected if the rated control frequency lies in the vicinity of harmonics of the mains frequency. The longer rise or decay times of narrow band filters require longer mark and space times of the pulse telegrams, so that the transmission takes a little longer in systems of this kind.

Audio frequency filter

Network clock

The network clock signal is derived from the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz). It is required both in the microprocessor for decoding the pulse telegrams received and also for operating the 7-day clock. The 7-day clock (weekly clock) running synchronously with the mains permits autonomous operation without ripple control transmissions. For this purpose it has fixed parametrized time lines or so-called memo lines, with which it detects the telegrams arriving. It performs the commands stored in the time or memo lines, provided the receiver does not receive telegrams to the contrary. It can be synchronized at any time with the time-of-day or current weekday with a pulse telegram. At the same time it transmits the synchronization to the calendar clock of the meter. Conversely the meter passes on a time shift (synchronize or set) to the 7-day clock, in particular when the voltage is restored after a failure.

7-day clock

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.6-7

RCR microprocessor

The RCR microprocessor decodes the pulse telegrams filtered out of the mains voltage with the audio frequency filter and from these forms the signals RCR1 to RCR6 for the tariff control in the meter (see section 4.5). The RCR microprocessor can decode all customary pulse telegrams (Semagyr, Ricontic, Decabit, Double Decabit, K22/Z22, etc.). All variables necessary such as code length, pulse duration, etc. can be parametrized. The RCR microprocessor can exchange messages with the meter via a communication bus (e.g. status signals of the ripple control receiver or meter, time-of-day). Further functions of the RCR microprocessor: Time functions (fixed or random switch on/off delay, wiper, loop, pulseinterval cycles) Learning functions (memorizing switching times and performance with loss of transmitter) Transmit repeat inhibit Programmed behaviour with mains failure and restoration Exact reset pulses, e.g. 14'51"/9" Automatic correction of pulse distortions Transmitter failure detection Setting time-of-day of meter or ripple control receiver Recording of specific events in non-volatile memory The free programming capability enables the scope of functions to be continuously supplemented as required without exchanging hardware.

Memory

The parameters and important instantaneous values for a mains failure are stored in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM) of the ripple control receiver. Access to the EEPROM via the RPT01 parametrizing tool is subject to strict security requirements according to EN 61010. Each of the 6 output signals RCR1 to RCR6 of the ripple control receiver basically represents the status of a "virtual" relay, i.e. for a conventional stand-alone ripple control receiver a relay could be operated directly in this way. With the integral ripple control receiver on the extension board these signals are fed to the control matrix in the meter for the tariff and load control. If a load is to be switched in this way, the corresponding output contact (solid state relay) is operated from the meter. The ripple control signals RCR1 to RCR6 are basically each derived from a double command. The receiver can execute the signals directly or first allow an interpreter program to run. These interpreter programs can for example delay a signal or trigger a recording as memo line.

Output signals

Interpreter

Landis+Gyr 4.6-8

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Parametrizing

Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver is performed with the RPT01 parametrization tool, software for 32-bit Windows operating systems specially developed for parametrizing Landis+Gyr ripple control receivers, via a separate optical interface on the extension board. The parametrizing data are stored in a non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the extension board. The 6 RCR signals RCR1 to RCR6 are defined with the parametrizing of the ripple control receiver, while use of these 6 RCR signals is determined by the parametrizing of the meter with the MAP190 parametrization tool (matrix definition).

4.6.4

Test key of ripple control receiver


A parametrized switching program is triggered by pressing the test key. The effect can be checked from the resulting statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6 (display or readout). The test key a plastic slider, which actuates a p.c.b. switch on the extension board is situated between the terminal blocks of the extension board.

Test key

T
Fig. 4.6.2 Arrangement of test key (example extension board 0430)

For access to the test key the terminal cover secured with factory seals must be removed.

Dangerous voltage

Danger

The test key should only be operated with a plastic tool suitable for this purpose. With a metal tool there is otherwise a danger of touching live conductors at the terminals. Contact with parts under voltage is dangerous to life.

4.6.5

Technical data of ripple control receiver


Standards
Ripple control receiver ......................................................... EN 61037 Safety conditions ................................................................. EN 61010 EMC - Emission ...................................................................... EN 50081-1 - Pollution ...................................................................... EN 50081-2

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.6-9

Ripple control systems


All customary pulse codes (Semagyr, Ricontic, Decabit, Double Decabit, K22/Z22, etc.) Code length, pulse length and pulse position can be parametrized

Electrical values
Input mains voltage single-phase ................................... 58 V or 230 V Frequency ........................................................................ 50 or 60 Hz Supply ........................................................... provided by basic meter

Filter values (parametrized)


Rated function voltage Uf ......... typ. 0.3 to 2.5% of rated mains voltage Rated control frequency fs ........................................... 110 to 2000 Hz Bandwidth .................................................................. 0.6 to 6 % of fs

External influences
Same as meter (see meter user manual)

4.6.6

Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate


8.8... Display check F.F Functional error 0.0 Identification 0.1.0 Reset counter 0.9.1 Time-of-day 0.9.2 Date C.6.0 Battery hours counter 2:1.8.0 S01 3:1.8.0 S02

72 832 138

+A -A 1.2.0 2.2.0 1.4.0 2.4.0 1.5.0 2.5.0 1.6.0 2.6.0 1.8.T 2.8.T 2.8.0 1.8.0 T = Energy tariff
S01: 1 imp = 1 Wh S02: 1 imp = 1 Wh

+Ri 5.2.0 5.4.0 5.5.0 5.6.0 5.8.T 5.8.0

+Rc 6.2.0 6.4.0 6.5.0 6.6.0 6.8.T 6.8.0

-Ri 7.2.0 7.4.0 7.5.0 7.6.0 7.8.T 7.8.0

-Rc 8.2.0 8.4.0 8.5.0 8.6.0 8.8.T 8.8.0

Pmax cumulated Last tm/P running P last integr. period Pmax Energy Total energy

K1: 1 imp = 1 Wh (+A) K2: 1 imp = 100 varh (+R)

Ownership designation

K3: Boiler K4: Electrial heating K5: K6: ID-No: 0128.0013 F: 12 fs (Hz): 183.3 Uf (%): 0.50

1 2

x
V A

Fig. 4.6.3

Tariff face plate (example ZxD400CT) 1 2 Output contact data Data of ripple control receiver RCR

Landis+Gyr 4.6-10

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.6.7

Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure


If all phases are concerned during a power failure, the meter performs a controlled disconnection (blocking of inputs and outputs, switching of tariff unit to standby operation and backup of data). It sends the ripple control receiver a failure warning, which causes the latter to perform its own disconnection program, including saving data to the EEPROM and the power-down program if parametrized. If the phase fails to which the ripple control receiver is connected, while the other two phase voltages or at least one remains, the ripple control receiver performs its own disconnection program and reports this to the meter. In this case the ripple control receiver does not receive a failure warning from the meter, but detects the failure as soon as the mains frequency fails for more than 500 ms. If the neutral line fails, the ripple control receiver can in fact still generate the network clock, but it can no longer detect any ripple control signal. It will detect this status as transmitter failure.

Voltage interruption

Voltage restoration

When the phase voltage(s) affected by the mains failure are restored, the ripple control receiver detects this by the return of the mains frequency and report by the meter. Following initializing of the ripple control receiver, there is a short wait until the audio frequency filter has responded and then run through the switch-on program (restoration of the data saved and setting of signals RCR1 to RCR6 corresponding to the parametrizing).

4.6.8

Connection diagrams
K3 E K4 K5 K6

Extension board 0430 with ripple control receiver no control inputs 4 output contacts (solid-state relays) Signal allocation for free parametrization

30 Lx

61

61 62 63

64 65 66

Fig. 4.6.4

Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver and 4 output contacts

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.6-11

4.6.9

Display and readout


The following ripple control receiver values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: Statuses of signals RCR1 to RCR6 Identification number of ripple control receiver The operating status of the ripple control receiver can also be indicated with an arrow symbol in the display: Arrow absent = ripple control receiver not ready Arrow displayed = ripple control receiver receiving pulse telegram Arrow flashing = ripple control receiver ready If signals RCR1 to RCR6 are used for tariff control, their statuses can also be seen from the tariff arrow symbols.

Values available

Display examples

Some examples are given below of ripple control receiver displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Status of signals RCR1 to RCR6 C: service data Figure means Line means Signal "1" (Pos. a) Signal "0" (Pos. b) 3: signal statuses

Identification number ripple control program

Landis+Gyr 4.6-12

H 71 0200 0030 b en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.7

Tariff control

H 71 0200 0026 f en

Revision history
Index a b c d e f Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 01.05.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 4 to 10 Control signals and synchronizing updated selectable synchronisation window of 2 to 9 s New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Fig. 4.7.2 supplemented with voltage failure event

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.7-2

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 Tariff control _____________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Control table _____________________________________________ 4.7-6 Registers/functions ________________________________________ 4.7-7 Aktivierung der Steuersignale ________________________________ 4.7-8

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.7-3

Landis+Gyr 4.7-4

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.7

Tariff control
This sub-chapter provides a survey of the various kinds of tariff control and the formation of control signals, as well as about the registers and functions controlled in this way.

4.7.1

Survey tariff control


ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters permit tariff control: via control inputs via the time switch (see 4.5) via a ripple control receiver (see 4.6) via event signals or status messages The methods of tariff control listed permit the requirements of the power supply company to be suitably defined by parametrization any combinations (assuming the meter is designed for this purpose).
Control table Signal sources
control inputs statuses event signals time switch ripple control receiver

AND matrix for 24 logic signals LSx


etc.

etc.

etc.

OR matrix for 16 control signals CS1-16 Energy / demand registers Demand monitoring Operating times Output relays / arrows
Reset inhibit Setting mode Test mode Time switch active etc.

Fig. 4.7.1

Survey tariff control

Signals from the various signal sources can be combined to form logic signals in the AND matrix and in the following OR matrix to control signals. These control the energy and demand registers in addition to other functions. The meter can also use the time switch signals directly instead of the control signals. All signals are available for transmission via output relays and activation of the arrows in the display, as well as the status signals such as "Reset inhibit active", "Meter in setting mode", etc.

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.7-5

4.7.2

Control table
Up to 16 control signals (CS1 to CS16) can be defined with the AND and OR matrices, so that they form combinations from the existing signals from the signal sources.
Control inputs Statuses TI1 ... TI10 Time/date invalid Demand monitoring Under/overvoltage Voltage failure Overcurrent Power factor fallen below TOU1 ... TOU16 RCR1 ... RCR6
etc.

etc.

Event signals

Matrix for assigning logic signals LS to the sources

Time switch Ripple control receiver

24 logic signals with AND combination LS1 ... LS24

Control signals CS1 ... CS16

OR matrix

Fig. 4.7.2

Formation of control signals

The following steps are necessary to determine the tariff control: 1. The power supply company first determines the required control functions, e.g. changeover of energy and demand tariffs with the associated tariff arrows in the display, based on the relevant tariff structure. Example: 3 energy and 2 demand tariffs. Every control function requires one of the control signals CSx or the time switch signals TOUx directly. One control signal can serve several functions. Example: CS1 and CS2 for tariff 1 and tariff 2 energy and demand, CS3 for tariff 3 energy and demand inhibition. The AND matrix links the signals of the relevant signal sources to logic signals LSx, the following OR matrix combines them to the control signals CSx. Example: external control with inputs TI1 and TI2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 0 produces LS1 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 0 produces LS2 TI1 = 0 and TI2 = 1 produces LS3 TI1 = 1 and TI2 = 1 produces LS4 LS1 produces CS3 LS2 produces CS2 LS3 or LS4 produces CS1. Finally the power supply company assigns the signals to the signal sources with respect to hardware or software (e.g. inputs to the control terminals). Example: TI1 Terminal T0-7 TI2 Terminal T0-8

2.

3.

4.

Landis+Gyr 4.7-6

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Each control signal can have one of the 3 following statuses: 1 (active) 0 (inactive) blank (no function) A control signal for example switches on a specific tariff register (energy or demand register) when active and off when inactive. The energy proportions of the selected measured value are accordingly recorded or not recorded in the register. All control signals not required remain in the "blank" condition and therefore have no function.
Register or function Control signal = "0" (inactive) Tariff or function inactive

Register or function Control signal = "1" (active)

Tariff or function active

Control signal not required Control signal = "blank" (no function)

Fig. 4.7.3

Control signal statuses

4.7.3

Registers/functions
Time switch signals TOU1 to TOU16 Control signals CS1 to CS16 Energy registers Demand registers Operating time registers Power factor registers Signal sources Event signals Output relays Arrows LCD ER1 ... ER24 MDR1 ... MDR24 OTR1 ... OTR8 PFR1 + PFR2

Demand monitoring Power factor monitoring K1 ... K8 Arrow 1 ... Arrow 12

Fig. 4.7.4

Controllable registers and functions

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.7-7

The following tariff registers and functions can be controlled according to the parametrization with control signals CS1 to CS16 or time switch signals TOU1 to TOU16: Energy registers (see 4.8 "Energy recording") Demand registers (see 4.9 "Demand recording") Operating time registers per tariff Power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors") Event signals of monitoring functions Output contacts Tariff arrows in liquid crystal display The output relays and the arrows in the display can also be assigned to all other signal sources, such as event signals and additional statuses like reset inhibit, test mode, setting mode, etc.

4.7.4

Activation of control signals


The signals at the output of the control table (CS1 to CS16) can be synchronized with the integrating period by parametrizing. The following possibilities are available: All output signals only change their status at the end of the present integrating period. All tariff changeovers, signal controls, etc. are therefore synchronous with the integrating period and do not generate a new start of the integrating period. All output signals change their status immediately when a corresponding input signal changes. Every output signal can be synchronized individually with the integrating period. The output signals therefore respond in different ways to changes in the input signals.

Landis+Gyr 4.7-8

H 71 0200 0026 f en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.8

Energy recording

H 71 0200 0024 h en

Revision history
Index a b c d e f g h Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 28.09.2000 12.03.2001 22.06.2001 18.04.2002 01.05.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision. Various corrections Energy registers rounding-off supplement Number of AT/CT registers, number of stored values Updating (terminology revision, types of recording, registers for secondary data, residual value processing), ZxD410AT replaces ZxD210AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Section 4.8.6: Reference added for memory determination for stored values

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.8-2

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 Energy recording __________________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.8-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.8-6 Formation of energy proportions______________________________ 4.8-7 Types of energy recording___________________________________ 4.8-8 Tariff control ____________________________________________ 4.8-10 Formation of stored values _________________________________ 4.8-10 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.8-11 Energy registers for primary and secondary data________________ 4.8-12

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.8-3

Landis+Gyr 4.8-4

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.8
4.8.1

Energy recording
This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording energy.

Survey
From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization). These measured values can be recorded as follows: In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs In the total energy registers as energy status and In the demand registers at demand tariffs (see 4.9 "Demand recording") In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cos can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors").

Versions

ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit: Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers, but no demand registers. Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy, total energy and demand registers.

Energy registers

The power supply company has 24 energy registers and 8 total energy registers available for energy recording by the ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters.
Tariff switching 24 demand registers Selection of data for display and readout Readout etc.

8 P running 8 energy total registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max. 8 meas. values etc. etc.

Display

Fig. 4.8.1

Block schematic diagram of energy recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.8-5

4.8.2

Available measured quantities for measured value formation


Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type. From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values. Each measured value is assigned a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA), the sum of the three phases (L) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and one or more quadrants The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted.

ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx

The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors.

8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants


+/-VA1 +/-VA2 +/-VA3 cos cos 1 cos 2 cos 3 +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 +/-R1 +/-R2 +/-R3 +VA - VA

Fig. 4.8.2

+A -A

Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx

ZFD400Cx

The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor.

8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants


cos

+R -R

Fig. 4.8.3

Measured values of ZFD400Cx

ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax

The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power.

8 measured values
+/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3

Fig. 4.8.4

+A -A

Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax

Landis+Gyr 4.8-6

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

+VA - VA

+R -R

+A -A

ZFD400Ax

The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available.

8 measured values

Fig. 4.8.5

4.8.3

Formation of energy proportions


The measured values scanned every second are fed via the selection matrix to the memory for the present value of the energy register provided. These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e.g. mW).

+A -A

Measured values of ZFD400Ax

Height dependent on power Fixed clock frequency 1s

Fig. 4.8.6

Energy proportions for energy and total energy registers

Adaptation to kWh takes place in the energy register, whereby the resolution of the memory is sufficient to permit recording of the very small amounts of energy during starting. Processing of energy proportions With low power in comparison with the rated power, several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit (1/10 Wh) is reached and the energy register is increased by 1. For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. This amount X is fed to the energy or total energy register, the rest remains in the value register.
Energy proportion value I Example: 0.001 to over 20,000 Wh I - X . 0.100 Wh X Value register

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh
total 12 digits
Fig. 4.8.7

of which 4 decimal places

Processing of energy proportions

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.8-7

Example:
Time 0s 1s 2s 3s Energy proportion value I 12.446 Wh 15.372 Wh 13.567 Wh 21.123 Wh Value register 0.046 Wh 0.018 Wh 0.085 Wh 0.008 Wh Energy register 0000.0124 kWh 0000.0278 kWh 0000.0413 kWh 0000.0635 kWh

Register resolution

Adaptation of the energy proportions is based on general principles, which apply both to mechanical counters as well as electronic tariff units. The highest power applied to the meter, the energy register units (e.g. kWh or MWh) and the value represented by the last digit of the energy register (0.1 - 1 - 10 etc. kWh) are then decisive. The resolution matched to the maximum demand is shown with those for the demand registers in the following table:
Energy P highest 50 500 W 500 W 5 kW 5 50 kW 50 500 kW 500 5000 kW 5 50 MW 50 500 MW Reading 0000.000 k...h 00000.00 k...h 000000.0 k...h 0000000 k...h 00000.00 M...h 0000000 k...h 000000.0 M...h 0000000 k...h 0000000 M...h 0000000 k...h Decade reading constant none none none none none x 10 none x 100 none x 1000 Demand Reading Decade reading constant

0.000 k... none 0.000 k... none 00.00 k... 000.0 k... none none

0.000 M... none 0000 k... x1 00.00 M... 0000 k... 000.0 M... 0000 k... none x 10 none x 100

k... / k...h M... / M...h

= kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh

4.8.4

Types of energy recording


The energy registers of the meter can record the energy proportions arriving in the following ways: as cumulated status (with or without stored values) as advance during the billing period (always stored values) as advance during the recording period of the load profile (only for recording in the load profile)

Energy recording

Landis+Gyr 4.8-8

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

8 registers, 1 each per measured value Total energy register 1 Cumulated status max. 24 energy registers Energy register X Advance Load profile Recording period Energy register 1 Status or consumption Tariff switching Latest stored value Resetting Latest stored value

max. 8 measured values

Fig. 4.8.8

Energy recording

Cumulated status

With energy recording as status the memory runningly adds the present value of energy. The consumption during a billing period is obtained from the difference between new and old status. Calculation of the energy consumption is made after every reading in the EDP of the power supply company. The reason that processing of the status is still preferred by the power supply company is because of the same processing for electronic and mechanical meters (the latter cannot record any advance). The total energy registers always record the cumulated status, even if the energy registers operate with energy consumption.
Storage at end of billing period 0042500

5300 0037200 4300 0032900

6600 0026300

Fig. 4.8.9

Energy recording as cumulated status

Advance during the billing period

For energy recording as advance during the billing period the meter sets the contents of the energy register concerned to zero at the end of the billing period and saves the previously determined consumption as stored value. It then records the energy consumption during the next billing period and saves this again as stored value. The power supply company can use the consumptions determined in this way directly for billing.
Landis+Gyr 4.8-9

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Reset at end of billing period

0042500

Energy recording as cumulated status


0037200 4300 0032900 6600

5300

6600

Energy recording as advance


5300 4300

0026300

Fig. 4.8.10 Energy recording as advance during the billing period

Advance during the recording period

Energy recording as advance during the recording period basically operates in the same way as energy recording as advance during the billing period. The meter uses a separate register, however, and the recording period of the load profile as control signal for start and end of energy recording. The register content is fed immediately and exclusively to the load profile, but not to the stored values registers. It can also only be displayed and read out via the load profile. One of the 24 energy registers is required for every measured value to be recorded as energy advance in the load profile. This is then not available for the tariff control.

Residual value processing

If the meter records energy as advance, it only stores the value according to the section as stored value or in the load profile. The remainder not displayed is retained in the memory and is included in the next billing or integrating period. The sum of energy advances therefore always corresponds to the cumulated status of the total energy registers.

4.8.5

Tariff control
The tariff switching determines which energy registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. The maximum of 8 measured quantities have up to 24 energy registers available for the ZxD410Ax/310Cx/400Cx, to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values. The associated energy proportions are runningly summated in the total energy registers.

4.8.6
Resetting

Formation of stored values


At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present value as latest stored value. The number of possible stored values can be parametrized (refer to section 4.13.3 "Memory management", section "Memory determination for stored values"). Every time a new stored value is stored, the oldest stored value is overwritten.

Landis+Gyr 4.8-10

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.8.7

Display and readout


The resolution of the total energy and energy tariff registers can be parametrized and has 7 or 8 digits with up to 4 decimal places. Either kWh / kvarh / kVAh or MWh / Mvarh / MVAh can be used as unit. The resolution of the advances can similarly be parametrized. The registers are displayed 5-digit with up to 4 decimal places.

Register size

Display

Since a maximum of 8 digits can be shown in the value field of the liquid crystal display (see 5.2), a window is placed over the register for the display. This determines the visible range.
Test mode off Display (examples) 7 digits without decimal place

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh
Test mode on

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kWh
Fig. 4.8.11 Display window

8 digits with 1 decimal place

A so-called test mode is provided for test purposes, which uses a higher resolution of the registers and therefore reduces the testing time accordingly. The desired resolution can be parametrized, but no more than 8 digits are available. Readout Display examples The values are shown the same in the readout as in the display. Some examples are given below of energy register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Stored value 02 (February) Active energy import (1) Total status (8.0)

Reactive energy import (3) Status (8) Tariff 2

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.8-11

Reactive energy in first quadrant (5) Status (8) Tariff 2 Active energy export (2) Status (8) Tariff 1 Apparent energy import (9) Status (8) Tariff 1 Active energy import in phase L1 (21) Status (8) Tariff 2 Active energy import in phase L2 (41) Status (8) Tariff 2

4.8.8

Energy registers for primary and secondary data


Meters for transformer connection (ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx) can be parametrized for primary or secondary data. The transformer data can be parametrized individually, by which the meter directly supplies the data assigned to the transformers connected. The display and readout data need no longer then be multiplied by a transformation factor. The individual parametrization of the meters to primary data is frequently not protected by the calibration seals. Some countries therefore demand that in parallel with the primary data the meters must also record at least the energy with reference to the secondary data. For this purpose it is possible with the meters ZxD400Ax and ZxD400Cx to parametrize the energy registers in principle with respect to the primary or secondary data. The first 16 energy registers are assigned for primary data and the 8 registers ER17 to ER24 for secondary data.

Landis+Gyr 4.8-12

H 71 0200 0024 h en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.9

Demand recording

H 71 0200 0025 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 11.02.2000 17.04.2000 28.09.2000 22.01.2001 18.04.2002 01.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Various corrections Number of AT/CT registers, number of stored values Updating (terminology revision, rolling maximum, residual value processing), ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.9-2

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.4 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 4.9.8 4.9.9 4.9.10 4.9.11 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey __________________________________________________ 4.9-5 Available measured quantities for measured value formation _______ 4.9-6 Formation of demand values _________________________________ 4.9-7 Formation of mean value of demand __________________________ 4.9-9 Mean demand value for last integrating period__________________ 4.9-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.9-19

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.9-3

Landis+Gyr 4.9-4

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.9

Demand recording
This sub-chapter explains in detail all functions for recording demand.

4.9.1

Survey
From the digital measured quantities prepared in the measuring unit (see 4.2 "Measuring unit") the power supply company can select up to 8 for further processing (by parametrization). These measured values can be recorded as follows: In the energy registers as energy status or energy consumption at energy tariffs (see 4.8 "Energy recording") In the total energy registers as energy status (see also 4.8 "Energy recording") and In the demand registers at demand tariffs In the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx the power factors cos can also be recorded in power factor registers (see 4.10 "Power factors").

Versions

ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have 2 basic versions with respect to tariff unit: Version with tariff unit T21 or T24 This has energy and total energy registers, but no demand registers. Version with tariff unit T41 or T44 This has energy, total energy and demand registers.

Demand registers

For demand recording by the meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx the power supply company has available 8 registers for running mean values of demand and 24 demand registers.
Tariff switching etc.

24 demand registers Selection of data for display and log Readout

8 P running 8 total energy registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max. 8 measured values etc. etc.

Display

Fig. 4.9.1

Block schematic diagram of demand recording ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-5

4.9.2

Available measured quantities for measured value formation


Various measured quantities for further processing are available depending on the meter type. From these the power supply company can form up to 8 measured values. Each measured value is assigned a power type (active power A / reactive power R / apparent power VA), the sum of the three phases (L) or in the ZMD a single phase (L1/l2/L3) and one or more quadrants The power types R and VA are only available in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. In the active energy consumption meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax use of the quadrants is also restricted.

ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx

The ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx has the most comprehensive measuring functions and therefore also provides the majority of measured quantities for further processing. In the energy and demand registers it can record a maximum of 8 power values and in the power factor registers the 4 power factors.

8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants


+/-VA1 +/-VA2 +/-VA3 cos cos 1 cos 2 cos 3 +/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3 +/-R1 +/-R2 +/-R3 +VA - VA

Fig. 4.9.2

+A -A

Measured values of ZMD300Cx / ZMD400Cx

ZFD400Cx

The ZFD400Cx only has the sum measured quantities and the mean power factor.

8 meas.values from meas.quantities/quadrants


cos

+R -R

Fig. 4.9.3

Measured values of ZFD400Cx

ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax

The ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax record the active power.

8 measured values
+/-A1 +/-A2 +/-A3

Fig. 4.9.4

+A -A

Measured values of ZMD300Ax / ZMD400Ax

Landis+Gyr 4.9-6

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

+VA - VA

+R -R

+A -A

ZFD400Ax

The ZFD400Ax only have the sum measured quantities available.

8 measured values

Fig. 4.9.5

4.9.3

Formation of demand values


The measured values scanned every second are fed to the assigned mean values of demand register. These are energy proportions with fixed clock time (1 second) and varying power (e.g. mW).

Energy proportions

+A -A

Measured values of ZFD400Ax

Height dependent on power Fixed clock frequency 1s

Fig. 4.9.6

Energy proportions

Processing of energy proportions

The energy proportions are adapted to the integrating period selected, i.e. multiplied by a factor inversely proportional to the integrating period. Examples: Multiplication factor 1 for a pulse interval of 60 minutes. Multiplication factor 4 for a pulse interval of 15 minutes. Multiplication factor 12 for a pulse interval of 5 minutes.
Proportion value I P Energy M MP I P - X . 0.1 kW Value register proportion Example: value I Multiplication 0.004 to over 80 W X (can only be 1 integrating period in this example) e.g. 4 for 15 min

0 0 0 0 kW

Fig. 4.9.7

Processing of energy proportions

With low power in comparison with the rated power, several energy proportions are required before the value of the last register digit is reached and the register is increased by 1. For this purpose a value register receives the energy proportions arriving (adds the new energy proportion value I to any remainder in the value register) and subtracts from this the highest possible integral multiple X of the significance of the last digit. This figure X is fed to the register, the remainder remains in the value register.

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-7

Example:
Time 0s 1s 2s 3s Energy proportion value I 0.046 kW 0.049 kW 0.053 kW 0.055 kW Value register 0.046 kW 0.095 kW 0.048 kW 0.003 kW Demand register 000.0 kW 000.0 kW 000.1 kW 000.2 kW

Register resolution

The resolution of the demand registers (significance of last visible digit) is basically dependent on the maximum power of the meter. The capacity of the register must be sufficiently large to ensure there is no overflow. The resolution of the register, however, should also not be too small. The resolution of the demand registers matched to the maximum meter power is shown together with that of the energy registers in the following table (demand registers with 4 digits):
Energy P highest 50 500 W 500 W 5 kW 5 50 kW 50 500 kW 500 5000 kW 5 50 MW 50 500 MW Reading 0000.000 k...h 00000.00 k...h 000000.0 k...h 0000000 k...h 00000.00 M...h 0000000 k...h 000000.0 M...h 0000000 k...h 0000000 M...h 0000000 k...h Decade reading constant none none none none none x 10 none x 100 none x 1000 Demand Reading Decade reading constant

0.000 k... none 0.000 k... none 00.00 k... 000.0 k... none none

0.000 M... none 0000 k... x1 00.00 M... 0000 k... 000.0 M... 0000 k... none x 10 none x 100

k... / k...h M... / M...h

= kW / kWh or kvar / kvarh or kVA / kVAh = MW / MWh or Mvar / Mvarh or MVA / MVAh

Landis+Gyr 4.9-8

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.9.4

Formation of mean value of demand


The existing 8 registers for mean values of demand of the running integrating period are permanently assigned to the 8 selected measured values. Each of these registers summates the measured values assigned during one integrating period. At the end of the integrating period the running mean values of demand are available for further processing in the demand registers. Several demand registers can access the same mean value of demand (different tariffs).
P P running

Simple mean value

t tm
Fig. 4.9.8

tm

tm = integrating period
Running mean value of demand

If the energy consumption varies, the mean value of demand can fluctuate considerably from one integrating period to the next. Rolling mean value The power supply company can, however, then also combine several intervals to a total integrating period to form a rolling mean value, which is renewed at every interval. For this purpose the individual mean values of demand formed during an interval period are accepted at the end of every interval period in a ring memory. The rolling mean value of demand is then formed from the relevant latest ring memory contents (up to 15 intervals can be considered). The rolling mean value of demand is subject to smaller jumps with fluctuating energy consumption than the individual mean value. The more intervals considered for an integrating period, the better the smoothing. The formation of the rolling mean value of demand begins with the first subinterval following a reset or tariff switching. As shown in the following example, a complete integrating period (5 intervals here) is required before the rolling mean value is formed. A new valid mean value of demand is then available at the end of every interval period (335 kW, 329 kW, 351 kW, etc.).

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-9

kW 256

P interval 309 271

478 360 225

423 330 171

363

kW P rolling 167 113 51 263

335

329

351

363 302

336

364

Gleitender Mittelwert ber 5 Intervallperioden

complete intgrating period over 5 interval periods

Fig. 4.9.9

Formation of rolling mean value of demand

The rolling mean value is provided as average value of the ring buffer contents, in the example shown therefore as follows (all values in kW): Interval 1: (0+0+0+0+0)/5 = 0 Interval 2: (256+0+0+0+0)/5 = 51 Interval 3: (309+256+0+0+0)/5 = 113 Interval 4: (271+309+256+0+0)/5 = 167 Interval 5: (478+271+309+256+0)/5 = 263 Interval 6: (360+478+271+309+256)/5 = 335 (1st valid value) Interval 7: (225+360+478+271+309)/5 = 329 (2nd valid value) Interval 8: (423+225+360+478+271)/5 = 351 (3rd valid value) etc.

Landis+Gyr 4.9-10

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Possible intervals

The following conditions apply to the determination of the interval and integrating period: Minimum interval and integrating period duration: Maximum interval and integrating period duration: Maximum number of intervals per integrating period: 1 min 60 min 15

This provides the following possibilities for interval determination:


Number of intervals Integrating period in minutes 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15

Duration of interval period in minutes 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 30 60 1 5 10 15 30 1 5 10 20 5 15 1 2 3 4 6 12 5 10 1 2 3 6 5 1 2 4

4.9.5

Mean demand value for last integrating period


At the beginning of every integrating period the running mean demand values are reset each time to zero. They are first stored as mean demand values for the last integrating period (freeze function) and are therefore available for display and readout during the next integrating period. In the case of rolling mean value, the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand at the end of every subinterval period.

Residual value processing

At the end of the integrating or subinterval period only the visible part of the present mean demand value is stored as mean value of demand for the last integrating period in the load profile. The residual value remaining in the value register is taken into account in the next integrating period.

Load profile

With simple demand measurement the mean values of demand for the last integrating period can be taken over by the load profile memory. The value is stored in the load profile at the end of every integrating period.The sum of the integrating periods therefore corresponds in this case to the cumulated status of the total energy registers.

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-11

In the case of rolling mean value, two cases are possible: If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the subinterval period, the mean value can be stored for the subinterval. It is not possible to store the mean value over several subinterval periods or the integrating period. If the recording period for the load profile corresponds to the integrating period, no demand values can be stored in the load profile. In this case energy values (statuses or advances) must be used.

4.9.6

Maximum demand
The highest mean value of demand determined during the entire billing period is highly important for tariff control.
P

P max Demand

P running t

Fig. 4.9.10 Determination of maximum demand

Provided the corresponding active tariff and demand measurement are not limited by the power supply company (refer to 4.9.9 "Demand inhibition"), the meter therefore compares the present mean value of demand at the end of each integrating period with the previous highest mean value of demand for the present billing period. If the present mean demand value is less than the highest mean value of demand, the maximum demand remains unchanged. If the present mean demand value is greater than the highest mean value of demand, the meter stores the present mean demand value as new maximum demand and simultaneously records the time (date and time-of-day) at which the new maximum occurred. The meter therefore determines a large number of mean demand values during the entire billing period, but normally only records the highest value. All other values are lost, unless the values are stored in a load profile.

Landis+Gyr 4.9-12

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Resetting

At the end of the billing period the reset signal stores the present maximum demand value together with date and time as latest stored value. Several stored values of succeeding integrating periods remain stored. Every time a new stored value is stored, the oldest stored value is overwritten. At the same time the maximum demand value is added to the previous sum of all maximum demand values and stored as cumulated maximum demand in the corresponding register. The maximum demand is then reset to zero and determination of a new maximum for the new billing period starts.

Demand registers

Each demand register comprises a memory each for the present maximum demand and for the cumulated maximum demand as well as up to 15 memories for stored values. Various demand values for the tariff control can be recorded in the 24 demand registers available. Any of the 8 existing mean values of demand can also be assigned to each demand register as input quantity. Several demand registers can also access the same mean value of demand to form various tariffs.
P running
last integrating period

Demand register 1 P max cumul. Latest stored value Reset 2 : P max 1 Date/time

Display Readout
Calendar clock

1: P running
= P rolling from N P interval N = 1 to 15

1>2?

yes

Tariff switching

P interval x

max. 8 measured values


Fig. 4.9.11 Demand registers

Tariff control

The tariff switching determines which demand registers take over the energy proportions at the given time. The maximum 8 present mean values of demand have up to 24 demand registers available to permit a convenient tariff structure for the various values.

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-13

4.9.7

Controlling the integrating period


Control of the integrating period can take place in three different ways: internally via the calendar clock and synchronized with this internally via the calendar clock, but not synchronized with this externally via a control input

internal, synchronous

Control of the integrating period takes place internally by the quartz oscillator of the calendar clock (see section 4.4). The integrating period can then be synchronized with the time-of-day, so that it always starts on the full hour (e.g. integrating period of 15 minutes starting at 10:00, 10:15, 10:30, 10:45, 11:00, 11:15 etc.). This form of control is normally used. When using load profiles this setting is even essential, since otherwise the profiles cannot be further processed by a data evaluation centre.

internal, asynchronous

Control of the integrating period is likewise internal, but not synchronized with the time-of-day. The integrating period is started again every time the unit is started. Since all units of the ZxD300 and ZxD400 series have a calendar clock, this application is somewhat unusual. It is used above all for very simple units without calendar clock and without load profile.

External Control

The external control of the integrating period is made via the same input mB as the demand inhibition (see chapter 4.9.9). The internal control does in fact run parallel, but the external has higher priority and determines the time grid of the integrating period.
external control signal via terminal mB
t

internal control signal from quartz oscillator


t

New start intregrating period

New start intregrating period

Time shift normally negligible


Fig. 4.9.12 Externally controlled integrating period

If the external signal comes before the internal, the demand comparison takes place immediately with a new start of the integrating period.

Landis+Gyr 4.9-14

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

If the internal signal is before the external, it likewise initiates the demand comparison and re-starts the integrating period. This re-start is interrupted, however, by the following external signal which re-starts itself. This normally produces a small time shift, but this is negligible if the external control is sufficiently accurate. The power supply company, however, must ensure sufficient accuracy of the external control. If the external control signal fails for any reason, the internal signal automatically takes over control of the integrating period while the external signal is absent. This permits the power supply company to use both internal and external control without having to use a second version for this purpose. With internal control, however, the control input mB must always have voltage applied (signal status "1"), since otherwise there is no demand measurement (see 4.9.9 "Demand inhibition"). Principle of control The integrating period is controlled by negative pulses (status "0") with a duration of at least 2 seconds and maximum 60 seconds.
P P running

t t IP Control signal 1 0 t t pulse t IP

Fig. 4.9.13 External control of integrating period

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-15

4.9.8

New start of integrating period


The following events result in a new start of the integrating period: Voltage failure
asynchronous integrating period IP kW P running Voltage failure Voltage return t IP t<t IP
Voltage interruption

New start IP

t IP

time-synchronized integrating period IP kW P running Voltage failure Voltage return New start IP

t IP kW P running

t IP Voltage failure N x t IP

t IP Voltage return

t IP

New start IP

t IP

t IP

t IP

t<t IP

t IP

Fig. 4.9.14 New start integrating period with voltage failure

- always with an asynchronous integrating period - with time-synchronized integrating period always if the voltage interruption continues beyond the integrating period. A shorter period then occurs for a new start, since the next new start is given by the time-synchronism (see illustration above, bottom). If the voltage is restored within the integrating period, the meter can continue demand measurement depending on the parametrizing and conclude in the correct manner (see illustration above, centre) or restart. Setting time/date - no new start with an asynchronous integrating period - always with a time-synchronized integrating period The shift in particular of the time-of-day would cause a too long (reset time) or too short integrating period (advance time). It is therefore necessary to re-start the time-synchronous integrating period (see following figure, middle part). The meter does, however, have a time window of 1% of the integrating period or max. 9 seconds, within which there is no new start.

Landis+Gyr 4.9-16

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

asynchronous integrating period IP kW P running Time shift Tariff switching Reset New start IP

no new start IP t IP t IP t<t IP t IP

time-synchronous integrating period IP kW P running Time shift New start IP

Tariff switching Reset no new start IP

t IP kW P running

t IP

t<t IP t IP Tariff switching Reset

t<t IP

t IP

no new start IP power comparison only at the end of the IP

t IP

t IP

t IP

t IP

Fig. 4.9.15 New start integrating period with time shift, tariff switching, reset

Synchronize time (with time-synchronized interval period) Synchronization of the time has the same effect as a shift, if the deviation is more than 1 % of the integrating period, but max. 9 seconds (see chapter 4.5.3 "Calendar clock"). Changeover demand tariff - always with an asynchronous integrating period - similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period, unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above, bottom) Actuate reset - always with an asynchronous integrating period - similarly with a time-synchronized integrating period, unless the meter only performs the tariff changeover at the end of the integrating period (see illustration above, bottom) For an integrating period begun, the meter always performs a demand comparison. For an asynchronous integrating period it always starts in the new tariff or in the new reset period with a full integrating period.

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-17

No new start

No new start of the integrating period is made for the following events: Set/synchronize time (for asynchronous integrating period) Demand tariff switching (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period) Actuate reset (for time-synchronized integrating period or external control of integrating period) With time-synchronized integrating period a tariff changeover or reset must not interrupt the integrating period. In the event of external control the signal transmitter determines the start and end of the integrating period. The meter, however, always performs a demand comparison in the old tariff or in the expired reset period. Two interrupted periods are possibly produced.

4.9.9

Demand inhibition
The power supply company can interrupt demand measurement for certain periods, e.g. on low tariff or during the weekend. It should be noted, however, that only the formation of the maximum demands, but not that of the running mean demand, can be suppressed. This is because it must be possible to suppress the formation of the maximum but recording in the load profile should be continued. Control of this time limiting is possible externally via the control input mB or by the internal control signals.

External control

The following applies if the integrating period is controlled externally via input mB: following every interruption of the signal voltage (status "0") at input mB, the meter performs a demand comparison and immediately restarts the integrating period. If the signal voltage returns within 60 seconds (status "1") as is the case with external control of the integrating period, the demand measurement started continues normally. If the control signal mB is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, the demand measurement is ended without demand comparison until voltage is restored to input mB.
Control signal mB 60 s Time limit of the power recording t
Fig. 4.9.16 Externally controlled limiting of demand measurement with external control of integrating period

t New start of integrating period

If, however, the integrating period is controlled internally, limiting via an external control input is not possible directly (see also below).

Landis+Gyr 4.9-18

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Internal control

As mentioned above, only the formation of maximum demands can be suppressed. This is performed by setting the control signal of the maximum demand register to status "0". This can take place for example with a ripple control receiver or a time switch. It is also possible by corresponding parametrizing of the control table to provide this function by an external control input.

4.9.10

Signal transfer
The integrating period can be transferred to external equipment via an output contact of the meter. The transfer is made according to the following diagram either in the opening circuit, in which the relay is connected in series with the contact or short-circuit connection, in which the relay is connected in parallel with the contact The contact is closed during the integrating period and controls by signal interruption. The interruption, i.e. the decoupling time te is 1 % of the integrating period, i.e. 9 seconds for example with a period of 15 minutes.

Opening circuit

Integrating period

te

Fig. 4.9.17 Transfer contact integrating period as opening circuit

The signal for demand limiting can be transferred in the same way. The contact is then open or closed throughout the time limit of the demand measurement. Following re-start of the integrating period at the end of the time limit, the contact closes delayed by the decoupling time te (1 % of the integrating period).

4.9.11

Display and readout


The resolution of the demand registers can be parametrized: The mean demand values and maximum demands are either 4 or 5 digits with up to 4 decimal places. Either kW / kvar / kVA or MW / Mvar / MVA can be used as unit. The cumulated maximum registers have 6 or 7 digits, with up to 4 decimal places possible.

Register size

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.9-19

Values available

The following demand register values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: present status of cumulated maxima present demand mean value with status of integrating period demand mean value of preceding interval period present demand maximum during the current resetting period with date and time of occurrence demand maxima of preceding billing periods as stored values, similarly with date and time

Display examples

Some examples are given below of demand register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Cumulated demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Present demand mean value Active power import Tariff 1 Demand mean value of preceding interval period Active power import Tariff 1 Demand maximum of present billing period Active power import Tariff 1 Date of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Time-of-day of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1 Stored value 04 of present demand maximum Active power import Tariff 1

Landis+Gyr 4.9-20

H 71 0200 0025 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.10

Power factors

H 71 0200 0033 a en

Revision history
Index a Date 28.02.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.10-2

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 Power factors ____________________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.10-5 Formation of mean value during integrating period ______________ 4.10-6 Formation of mean value during resetting period ________________ 4.10-8 Display and readout _______________________________________ 4.10-9

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.10-3

Landis+Gyr 4.10-4

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.10

Power factors
This sub-section explains in detail all functions for recording power factors.

4.10.1

Survey
Recording of power factors cos is reserved for combimeters ZMD300Cx and ZxD400Cx, which calculate these from the relevant active and apparent powers, if the meter is configured accordingly.

Instantaneous values

The following instantaneous values of power factors are provided by the microprocessor as measured quantities, i.e. calculated every second from the relevant active and apparent powers (see also 4.2.3 "Formation of measured quantities"): PF total: Total power factor cos (mean value of the 3 phases) PF L1: Power factor cos1 of phase L1 (only in ZMD) PF L2: Power factor cos2 of phase L2 (only in ZMD) PF L3: Power factor cos3 of phase L3 (only in ZMD)
PF total = A L S L A L1 S L1 A L2 S L2 A L3 S L3
PF x Instantaneous value
Fig. 4.10.1 Instantaneous values of power factors

PF L1 =

Calculation of PF x from A (active power) and S (reactive power) every second

Calculation of S: S = P 2 + Q2 or S = U rms. I rms

PF L2 =

PF L3 =

Display PF x Readout PF x

These instantaneous values of power factors are available for display and readout. No other use is provided. Mean value during integrating period The mean value of power factor during the integrating period can be formed from the running mean values of demand of active and apparent power recorded during the last integrating period (positive sum of the three phases) and from this the minimum power factor determined. The mean value can also be accepted by the data profile to permit the energy supply company also to assign the relevant power factor to the individual mean values of demand and the maximum demand.

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.10-5

Mean value during resetting period

From the total energy of active and apparent power recorded (positive sum of the three phases) the meter can finally also calculate a mean value during the resetting period (billing period). The meter calculates the value every second and can save it at the end of the resetting period as stored value.
Power factor registers Tariff switching cos 24 demand registers etc. Selection of data for display and log Readout

8 P running 8 total energy registers 24 energy registers Tariff switching Formation of max. 8 measured values etc. etc.

Display

Fig. 4.10.2 Block schematic diagram of mean value formation power factor cos

Readout/Display

Readout of the data recorded can be made according to IEC 62056-21 or the DLMS concept (see chapter 6 "Communication interfaces"). The data can also be displayed.

4.10.2

Formation of mean value during integrating period


Only combimeters with tariff unit T41 or T44, i.e. with demand recording, can form this mean value during the integrating period. The two measured values active power import in the three phases +A and apparent power import in the three phases +S must be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the integrating period. Of these the meter uses the running demand mean value of the integrating period just completed to calculate the mean power factor PF IP during the integrating period. Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.

Landis+Gyr 4.10-6

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

P running S P running +A Measured values P last IP +A P last IP S PF register 1

P last IP S P last IP +A

Measured value 8 apparent power (sum of phases) Measured value 7 active power (sum of phases)

PF IP =

for minimum power factor

PF register 2 Tariff switching Data profile

Fig. 4.10.3 Mean value formation during integrating period

Minimum formation

The evaluation, i.e. the determination of the power factor minimum PF min, is made in one or two power factor registers similar to maximum formation in the demand registers.
1: PF last IP PF register 1 PF min cumul. latest stored value Reset 2 : PF min 1 Date/time Display Readout Display Readout

1.0
yes

1>2?

yes

Calendar clock

Tariff switching PF register 2 PF min cumul. latest stored value Reset 2 : PF min 2 Date/time

T > T min ?

minimum apparent power

1>2?

yes

Calendar clock

Tariff switching

Fig. 4.10.4 Determination of minimum power factor PF min

Each power factor register comprises a memory for both the present minimum power factor PF min and the cumulated minimum power factor PF min cumulated, in addition to several memories for stored values. At the end of every integrating period a comparison is made of the present minimum power factor PF min (lowest value of power factor so far) and the mean value of power factor PF last IP determined during the integrating period. If PF last IP is less than the present PF min, the PF last IP is stored as new PF min together with date and time. Otherwise PF min remains unchanged. A threshold for the minimum apparent power prevents the meter recording the (frequently worse) power factor at demands which are too low. Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF min is cumulated in the PF min cumulated memory and recorded as stored value together with date and time. The present PF min is then set to the value 1 and the time reset to zero.
H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function Landis+Gyr 4.10-7

Tariff switching

The tariff switching determines in which of the two power factor registers the comparison is made.

4.10.3

Formation of mean value during resetting period


Combimeters with tariff unit T21 or T24, i.e. without demand recording, can also form the mean value during the resetting period (billing period). The two measured values active power import in the three phases +A and apparent power import in the three phases +S must also be set by the parametrization to determine the power factor during the resetting or billing period. Of these the meter uses the relevant value of two energy registers with energy import to calculate the mean power factor PF RP during the resetting period. Owing to the powers +A and +S the calculation is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.
ME8: Energy import +S ME7: Energy import +A Measured values Energy import +A Energy import +S Register PF RP Reset
latest stored value
Mean value over billing period newly calculated every second Measured value 8 apparent power (sum of phases) Measured value 7 active power (sum of phases)

PF RP =

Fig. 4.10.5 Mean value formation during resetting period

Since the values of the energy registers are updated every second, a new calculation of the power factor is also performed every second during the resetting period. Before resetting at the end of the billing period PF RP is saved as stored value together with date and time. The PF RP register is then reset to the value 1.

Landis+Gyr 4.10-8

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.10.4

Display and readout


The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization instantaneous values present status of cumulated minimum PF min cumulated the mean value at the end of the integrating period PF last IP the present power factor minimum PF min during the present billing period with time of day and date of occurrence the power factor minima PF min in the preceding billing periods as stored values likewise with time and date the number of times exceeded per power factor threshold

Values available

Display examples

Some examples are given below of power factor register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
cos (13) Mean value of last integrating period (5)

cos (13) Minimum of current billing period (3)

Date of minimum

Time-of-day of minimum

cos (13) Minimum stored value of April (04)

cos (13) Mean value of current resetting period (0)

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.10-9

cos phase L1 (33) Instantaneous value (7)

Landis+Gyr 4.10-10

H 71 0200 0033 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.11

Operating time registers

H 71 0200 0244 - en

Revision history
Index Date 31.03.2003 Comments First edition

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.11-2

H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.11 4.11.1 Operating time registers ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.11-5

H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.11-3

Landis+Gyr 4.11-4

H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.11

Operating time registers


This sub-chapter explains the functions of the operating time registers.

4.11.1

Survey
The following operating times can be recorded in operating time registers: Total operating time of meter Operating time per tariff specified Operating time of battery

Total operating time

This register shows the total operating time of the meter in the network. The time is measured and added in the register as soon as the meter is connected to the supply. The register can be cleared together with the operating times for each tariff via the interface.

Operating time per tariff

A maximum of 8 operating time registers with tariff settings are available. Control is performed in the same way as for the energy or demand registers. The total operating time can therefore be assigned to the individual tariffs. The sum of the registers with tariff should always be the same as the total operating time. If this is not the case, there may be a meter malfunction present or an attempted fraud. The registers can be cleared together with the total operating time via the interface.

Battery operating time

This register measures the time during which the battery is inserted in the unit. It is immaterial whether the unit has voltage applied or not. By regular measurement of the battery voltage the battery is also used during mains operation. When the battery is changed the register must be cleared via the interface or in setting mode.

Display and readout Display examples

The operating time registers are displayed in minutes. Some examples are given below of operating time register displays. The identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Total operating time (0) C: service data 8: operating time Operating time tariff 1 (1) C: service data 8: operating time

H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.11-5

Battery operating time (0) C: service data 6: battery

Landis+Gyr 4.11-6

H 71 0200 0244 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.12

Formation of billing periods (resetting)

H 71 0200 0245 a en

Revision history
Index a Date 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Section 4.12.3: Reference added for memory determination for stored values

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.12-2

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4 Formation of billing periods (resetting)________________________ 4.12-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block______________________________________________ 4.12-5 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12-6 Display and readout_______________________________________ 4.12-6

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.12-3

Landis+Gyr 4.12-4

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.12

Formation of billing periods (resetting)


This sub-chapter explains resetting of the registers at the end of billing periods.

4.12.1

Survey
Resetting at the end of a billing period applies to the energy, total energy, maximum demand and minimum power factor registers and can take place in the following ways: Manually with the reset button (This is situated under the front door and is secured with a company seal.) Externally via the corresponding control terminals with the functions KA and KB Internally by the calendar clock, e.g. - exactly at the end of the month (reset is always made at midnight, i.e. on the first day of the following month at 00:00, since 24:00 does not exist) - in any month or every 2nd, 3rd, 4th month, etc. - on one or two specific days within a month always at midnight - on a specific day every week (1 = Monday - 7 = Sunday) at midnight in each case - coupled to the summer/winter changeover Internally by the ripple control receiver of the extension board By a formatted command via the serial interface (With a handheld terminal, for example, the reader can actuate the reset locally and then read out the data without opening a seal.) The reset always affects the entire meter, i.e. all registers.

4.12.2

Reset block
Every reset, regardless how initiated, starts a time window, during which a further reset is not possible, the so-called reset block. The duration can be selected between 0 minutes (no block) and several hours. A voltage interruption can remove the block, which can be particularly useful during a test. The reset block (inhibit) only acts on the source which has actuated the reset. The other sources are not blocked. Depending on the parametrizing the active reset block is indicated by a flashing arrow.

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.12-5

4.12.3

Identification of stored values


With a reset the correspondingly parametrized register values are stored in the stored value profile (refer to section 4.13.3 "Memory management", section "Memory determination for stored values"). The index of the stored values is given a specific supplement. This can either be the status of the reset meter or, particularly with monthly resetting, the number of the relevant month. Example: 1.8.1.07 = status active energy tariff 1 end of July. With monthly numbering the stored values for January are therefore always given the number 01, those for February the number 02, etc. From this number the reader can immediately allocate the stored value to the relevant month. This form of numbering refers to the calendar clock. If a second reset takes place within one month (e.g. for a change of customer) two stored values have the same number. They can then be distinguished on one hand by the sequence and on the other hand by the time of resetting. If the reset takes place at midnight, the time shows the date and time-ofday of the following day. Nevertheless the stored value still receives the number of the foregoing period, e.g. of the previous month. This also applies if the reset signal arrives after midnight. The meter has a time window of 6 hours, within which it uses the number of the previous month.

4.12.4

Display and readout


The following values are available for display and readout depending on the parametrization: Reset counter Time of last reset Stored values reset counter (number, date and time) Stored values of registers stored in stored value profile (date, time and register value)

Values available

Display examples

Some examples are given below of reset displays. The identification numbers for the individual data correspond to the energy data identification system OBIS (see 5.2.3 "Identification number system").
Reset counter Measured quantity 0 Type of measurement 1.0 Date of reset Stored value 03 1st april 2002

Landis+Gyr 4.12-6

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Time-of-day of reset Stored value 03 00:00 midnight Active energy import (1) Status (8) Tariff 1 Stored value 03 Storage date Stored value 03 1st april 2002 Storage time Stored value 03 00:00 midnight

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.12-7

Landis+Gyr 4.12-8

H 71 0200 0245 a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.13

Profiles

H 71 0200 0032 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 29.09.2000 18.12.2000 02.04.2001 18.04.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Status entry adapted in data profile "Reset" event type supplemented Measured values, event signals, status entry, memory depth and display updated, data profile replaced by load profile, status supplemented New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 New memory management with software version B21, new events

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.13-2

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 4.13.3 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 Event log _______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Load profile _____________________________________________ 4.13-8 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.13-3

Landis+Gyr 4.13-4

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.13

Profiles
This sub-chapter explains the functions of the event log (aperiodic memory) and of the load profile (periodic memory) and division of the available memory.

4.13.1

Event log
The event log is an aperiodic memory. The time of occurrence (time and date) and the relevant event number are therefore always recorded for specific events. For every event the meter can store additional data such as event signals, error reports or statuses of the total energy registers. The memory required for each entry in the event log varies accordingly. The memory available for the event profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by the parametrization (see section 4.13.3 "Memory management"). The event log entries can be displayed and read out via the interfaces. For display the event log can be selected with its own menu item in the display menu (see chapter 5.3 "Types of display").

Event types

The following table shows which event types can be recorded under which event number in the event log:
Event type Tariff registers cleared Load profile memory cleared Battery charge low Battery voltage ok Meter reset performed Summer/winter changeover Time/date newly set (old values) Time/date newly set (new values) Control inputs status changed Undervoltage phase L1 Undervoltage phase L2 Undervoltage phase L3 Overvoltage phase L1 Overvoltage phase L2 Overvoltage phase L3 Voltage failure Voltage return Overcurrent phase L1 Overcurrent phase L2 Overcurrent phase L3 Overcurrent neutral Number 2 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Landis+Gyr 4.13-5

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Event type Power factors fallen below (4) Power factors exceeded (8) Error during self-test (4) Voltage failure phase 1 Voltage failure phase 2 Voltage failure phase 3 Error "Battery voltage low" Error "Time/date invalid" Error "Access measuring system memory" Error "Time base" Error "Ripple control receiver" Error "Communication unit" Error "Display and control panel Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" Error "Measuring system failed" Error "Re-programming failed" Error "Setting mode failed" Error "System failed" Error "Communication blocked" Error "Wrong flash memory identification" Error "Wrong function extensions identification" Failure of an SMS message transmission to GSM modem Important operating message recorded

Number 29 to 32 33 to 40 45 to 48 49 50 51 65 66 75 76 78 79 80 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 105 106

Display

The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the event log is to be contained in the display or service menu. The following procedure should be adopted to display entries in the event log: 1. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display check appears.

2.

If the event is contained in the display menu, press the "up" or "down" display button again briefly. If the event is contained in the service menu, press the Reset button briefly under the front door. The first item of the menu concerned appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data).

Landis+Gyr 4.13-6

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

3.

Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Event log" menu item appears (denoted with P.98).

4.

Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the date of the first event appears. The power supply company can determine by parametrizing whether the latest event appears first followed by the others in decreasing date sequence or whether the oldest appears first with the others in increasing date sequence.

(30 June 2002) 5. Press the "down" display button briefly. The time-of-day of the first event is displayed.

6.

Press the "down" display button briefly. The number of the first event is displayed.

(Voltage failure) 7. Display the remaining entries in the event log in chronological order by holding down the "down" display button. The end of the event log is denoted by "End".

8.

Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until return is made to the display menu. (Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function and causes a return to the operating display.)

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.13-7

Readout

The event log data can be read out with DLMS or according to the VDEW specification (R5/R6 commands). The power supply company can read the complete profile or only a part. For this purpose the start and end of the part must be entered with a readout instruction.

4.13.2

Load profile
In contrast to the event log, the load profile is a periodic memory, which continuously records the quantities specified following every recording period (this normally corresponds to the integrating period). The following events lead to additional entries in the load profile: voltage failure and voltage restoration, time shifts and manual resets.

Structure

Every entry in the load profile comprises a time, various important status information items and the individual measured values. The maximum 16 channels of the load profile comprise time entry, status entry and the maximum 14 possible measured values.
Date / Time Status up to 14 measured values

Fig. 4.13.1 Structure of load profile

The memory available for the load profile can be determined by the power supply company within specific limits by parametrization (see section 4.13.3 "Memory management"). Measured values The following measured values can be recorded in the load profile: Demand mean values (P last integrating period) Power factor mean values (PF last integrating period) Energy tariff registers (status or advance) Total energy registers Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period Phase currents as mean value in integrating period Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period Recording period If the load profile records the mean demand values, the recording period corresponds to the integrating period (or to the interval period with rolling demand measurement) of the demand registers (see also chapter 4.9 "Demand recording"). If it only records the energy tariff register values, the status of the energy totals, the voltages and/or currents, the recording period can be set individually. The status entry comprises the following bits (bit 0 = LSB): Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Landis+Gyr 4.13-8

Status entry

Fatal error occurred Power reserve of calendar clock exhausted (time invalid) Incomplete measurement owing to integrating period too short
H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Bit 3

Summer or winter time Depending on the parametrization this bit is static (1 = summer, 0 = winter) or dynamic, i.e. only active during the first recording period following the change from summer to winter time and vice-versa. Resetting performed Time/date set Voltages returned (power up) Voltages (3 phases) failed (power down) not used not used not used not used not used Event log completely deleted Load profile memory completely deleted Status word recorded before setting last time reserved reserved reserved Integrating period started (SOI - start of interval) Integrating period ended by tariff changeover (EOI - end of interval) Integrating period ended prematurely (e.g. by time setting) Integrating period ended normally by external control Integrating period ended normally by internal control

Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 Bit 22 Bit 23

Bit 24 to Bit 31 reserved for future extensions It can be selected by parametrizing whether bits 0 to 15 or bits 0 to 31 are to be displayed. Display Entries in the load profile can be displayed on the meter as follows: 1. Starting from the operating display press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display check appears.

2.

Press the "up" or "down" display button again briefly. The first item of the display menu appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data).

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.13-9

3.

Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the "Load profile" menu item appears (denoted with P.01).

4.

Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the date of the last entry appears.

(30 August 2002) 5. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly until the date of the desired day appears (the end of the load profile is denoted with "End", see also point 9).

(29 August 2002) 6. Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until the time of the first recording or integrating period of the day appears.

7.

Press "up" or "down" display button briefly until the time of the desired recording or integrating period appears.

All measured values and the status entry are shown in a rolling display (changing every 2 seconds).

Status entry display (8 = summer)

Landis+Gyr 4.13-10

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

e.g. P last IP of +A

e.g. P last IP of +Ri 8. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The time of the next or preceding recording or integrating period is displayed with their measured values in a rolling display. The end of the day is denoted with "End".

9.

Press the "up" or "down" display button (at least 2 seconds) until a jump is made to the next highest level (day selection list or display menu). Simultaneous operation of the "up" and "down" display buttons interrupts the present function at any time and causes a return to the operating display.

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.13-11

Status entry display:


Bits 0 to 7

Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Fatal error present Time/date invalid (power reserve exhausted) Incomplete measurement, IP too short Summer/winter (8=summer, 0=winter) Reset performed Time/date reset Voltage restored (power up) Total voltage failure (power down)

Both figures can have a value between 0 (no bit set) and F (all 4 bits set).
Bits 8 to 15

Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 * * * * Value in hexadecimal code


* not used

* Event log completely deleted Load profile memory completely deleted Status word recorded before setting last time

The first figure can have the value 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 or 14, the second figure is not used. Readout The data of the load profile can be read out with DLMS or IEC 62056-21 according to the VDEW specification. The power supply company can read the entire profile or part of it. Deletion of the data in the load profile is only possible in accordance with the specific national provisions. With re-parametrization of the load profile structure (e.g. more or less channels) the entire load profile is deleted automatically.

Deleting load profile

Landis+Gyr 4.13-12

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.13.3

Memory management
Meters of the ZxD series with software version B21 or higher have a defined memory area, which can be freely assigned by the power supply company within specific limits for the data to be stored. The power supply company is therefore able to assign more or less memory in the meter configuration for stored values, event log or load profile according to requirements. Free division of memory only possible when ordering

Note

The division of the memory must be made at the time of ordering. It cannot be altered retroactively. The memory area is defined for the billing values and cannot be changed, which ensures that there is always sufficient memory available for all energy, demand and other registers. The remaining memory can only be freely divided in complete memory blocks (so-called "memory pages"). A single memory page comprises 263 bytes.
Constant memory area for billing data

Maximum memory area for stored values and profiles (480 kBytes)

Variable memory area for stored values Variable memory area for event log Variable memory area for load profile

Fig. 4.13.2 Division of memory area available

480 kbytes are available. These can be allocated as follows:


Use Stored values Event log Load profile Memory size 0 to max. 20 kByte 0 to max. 21.5 kByte 0 to max. 480 kByte Number of memory pages 0 to max. 78 0 to max. 84 0 to max. 1870

Memory determination for stored values

In ZxD meters the stored values for energy, power and power factor registers are stored in one profile. In the display and readout according to IEC, however, they are shown allocated to the relevant register.

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.13-13

The memory required for the stored values depends on the profile width and memory depth: Profile width: number of registers for which stored values are formed, i.e. maximum 24 energy and 24 demand or power factor registers Memory depth: number of stored values to be stored by each register, i.e. maximum 53 stored values (corresponding to one year with weekly resetting) Both functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can comprise a maximum of 21.5 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Reset actuation (always stored) Reset time (always stored) Reset counter (always stored) Energy tariff registers (status or advance) Demand registers (demand maximum with time stamp) Power factor registers (minimum with time stamp) Memory required 1 byte 5 bytes 4 bytes 6 bytes per register 9 bytes per register 9 bytes per register

Example:

Recording of 16 energy registers, 16 demand registers and 2 power factor registers with 15 stored values each per register. Memory required = 15 ((16 6) + (18 9) + 1 + 5 + 4) bytes = 4020 bytes or 16 memory blocks

Memory determination for event log

Specific information or registers defined by the meter parametrizing are stored in the event log for every event, likewise determined by the meter parametrizing. The memory required for the event log depends on the profile width and memory depth: Profile width: type and number of registers stored for every event, e.g. status information, total energy registers Memory depth: number of events to be stored in the event log, i.e. maximum 255 events Both functions can be freely specified by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can amount to maximum 20 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Time of event (always stored) EDIS status (always stored) Event number (should always be stored) Error register Total energy registers 1 to 10 Memory required 5 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 6 bytes per register

Landis+Gyr 4.13-14

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Example:

Recording of 250 events with time of day, EDIS status, event number and error register. Memory required = 250 (5 + 2 + 1 + 4) bytes = 3000 bytes or 12 memory blocks

Memory determination for load profile

The memory available for the load profile is determined automatically by the order program based on the total memory and the memory assigned for the stored value profile and event log. For this purpose, however, the load profile must be activated in the meter configuration. The memory required for the load profile depends on the profile width, the length of the recording period and the memory depth: Profile width: number of registers stored in the load profile, i.e. maximum 14 energy, demand or instantaneous value registers Length of recording period: (selectable between 1 and 60 minutes): this determines the number of entries per day Memory depth: number of days to be recorded in the load profile All three functions can be freely defined by the power supply company. The memory required, however, can only comprise a maximum of 480 kbytes. The following table shows the memory required for the individual values:
Value Time of load profile entry (always stored) EDIS status (always stored) Demand mean values of last integrating period Power factor mean values of last integrating period Energy tariff registers (status or advance) Total energy registers Phase voltages as mean value in integrating period Phase currents as mean value in integrating period Mains frequency as mean value in integrating period Memory required 5 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes

The memory depth of the load profile is calculated by the following formula: Memory available in bytes (bytes per entry) (integrating periods per day + 1) Example 1: Recording of 4 mean demand values with a recording period of 15 minutes (96 entries per day) and 460 kbytes available memory. Memory depth = 460'000 / ((5 + 4 + (4 4)) (96 + 1)) = 189 days

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.13-15

Example 2:

Recording of 6 energy registers, 1 power factor register and 3 phase voltages with a recording period of 5 minutes (288 entries per day) and 480 kbytes available memory. Memory depth = 480'000 / ((5 + 4 + (6 6)+ 4 + (3 4)) (288 + 1)) = 27 days

Landis+Gyr 4.13-16

H 71 0200 0032 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.14

Monitoring functions

H 71 0200 0031 d en

Revision history
Index a b c d Date 29.09.2000 07.01.2002 18.04.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Hysteresis limit value p. 4.10-5 now 5..3600 s (1..3600s) ZxD210AT replaced by ZxD410AT ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.14-2

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 4.14.4 4.14.5 4.14.6 4.14.7 Monitoring functions ______________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.14-5 Functional principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Application possibilities for event signals_______________________ 4.14-7 Voltage monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-7 Current monitoring________________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.14-3

Landis+Gyr 4.14-4

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.14

Monitoring functions
This sub-chapter explains the functions for monitoring values and the generation and transmission of corresponding event signals.

4.14.1

Survey
The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx can monitor various values and generate event signals if specific limits are exceeded or fallen below for a sufficiently long time. These event signals can be used for tariff control (see chapter 4.7), for counting in event registers, for entry in the event log (see chapter 4.13) or for transmission to external devices via an output contact. Active energy or combimeters can monitor the values in the table below:
Values and type of monitoring Phase voltages (failure, over- and undervoltages) Phase currents (overcurrents) Neutral current (overcurrent) Running demand mean value or demand mean value of last integrating period (exceeded) Power factor mean value (fallen below) ZMD300Ax ZxD400Ax yes yes ZMD only yes no ZMD300Cx ZxD400Cx yes yes ZMD only yes yes

Other values monitored or recorded are mains frequency, direction of rotating field and the phase angles. They only appear in the display or readout, however, and are not therefore described further here.

4.14.2

Functional principle
Threshold T Number n M

M>T? or M<T? no

yes

Hysteresis ny=nx+1 counter n nx 0 ny=nx-1 ny = n M ? no

yes

Set event M

Interrogation of monitored value M


Voltage Current P running Power factor

next value
no ny = 0 ? yes Delete event M

Fig. 4.14.1 Principle of monitoring of value exceeded

Monitoring of exceeding of a value takes place on the following principle (monitoring of falling below operates in a similar way).

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.14-5

The value M monitored (e.g. a phase voltage) is compared every second with a specific limit (threshold T). Value too high If the value M monitored is greater than the threshold T, the so-called hysteresis counter n is increased by 1 or counts upwards every second if this condition continues. When the count has reached a specific limit value x (adjustable from 5 to 3600 s) the counter generates the corresponding event signal, provided the signal from the CS matrix or timer has released the monitoring of value M. The power supply company can set the response sensitivity as required with the hysteresis limit value x (1 = immediate response the first time the value is exceeded, 3600 = response only after the value has been exceeded for one hour). Value not too high If the value M monitored is smaller than the threshold T, the hysteresis counter n remains at zero or is reduced by 1 if its count is not already zero. Any event signal set is only deleted when the count is zero. The event is therefore set with a delay and deleted according to the set hysteresis limit value x. The diagram below shows the effect of hysteresis with the example of voltage monitoring with a hysteresis limit value x of 5.
Voltage
5 4 3 2 1 0

Hysteresis

Hysteresis counter with limit value x = 5 Threshold T for overvoltage Voltage waveshape (mean values per second)

Time

Overvoltage set event Duration of overvoltage

deleted

Fig. 4.14.2 Effect of hysteresis

In the example above the overvoltage event is set with a delay of 5 seconds after the threshold is exceeded because the hysteresis counter only reaches its limit value after 5 values of overvoltage are detected. To delete the overvoltage event the voltage must also lie below the threshold for at least 5 seconds, since the hysteresis counter only returns to zero after the threshold has been fallen below 5 times. If the voltage exceeds the threshold for less than 5 seconds, the counter does not set an event. Nor does it delete it if the voltage falls below the threshold briefly.

Landis+Gyr 4.14-6

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

4.14.3

Application possibilities for event signals


If the meter has recorded an event and this is released, the corresponding event signal can be used as follows: Tariff control Each event signal can be set via the control matrix for tariff control, e.g. if the phase current exceeds a specific threshold, it could set the meter to a different tariff level. Event counter An event counter counts the individual events and provides this to the display and/or the readout. Entry in event log The counter records the time and date on which the event occurred. It can therefore record the event with the corresponding number, time and date in the event log (aperiodic memory). This provides the power supply company with an event log corresponding to its requirements. Transmission The event signal can also be transmitted to external devices via an output contact. It can also activate one of the arrows of the display to indicate the relevant status optically.

4.14.4

Voltage monitoring
The voltage monitoring comprises the following elements: Voltage failure in each individual phase (fixed threshold 20 V) Total voltage failure in all phases Overvoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold) Undervoltage in each individual phase (parametrized threshold)

Under-/overvoltage

If the individual phase voltages are greater than 35 V, the meter can check these for under- and overvoltages. For this purpose the power supply company sets a lower and an upper threshold. If a phase voltage falls below the lower threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Undervoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis. If a phase voltage exceeds the upper threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overvoltage" for the relevant phase after a delay determined by the hysteresis. The meter can accept both an undervoltage and an overvoltage as described in section 4.14.3.

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.14-7

4.14.5

Current monitoring
The current monitoring comprises the following individual monitored values: Overcurrent in individual phases (parametrized threshold) Overcurrent in neutral in the ZMD (parametrized threshold)

Overcurrent

The meter checks the individual phase currents and the neutral current (ZMD) with respect to overcurrent (= overload). The power supply company can set a threshold for this purpose. If a phase current or neutral current falls below its threshold, the meter sets the event signal "Overcurrent" for the relevant phase or neutral after a delay determined by the hysteresis. The meter can accept an overcurrent as described in section 4.14.3.

4.14.6

Demand monitoring
The meter can monitor the running mean values of demand for maximum 8 measured values with respect to exceeding of individually adjustable thresholds. For this the meter uses either the running mean value of demand or the mean value of the last integrating period of a measured value. Since it concerns a value determined over the integrating period, no hysteresis is required. For the running mean value of demand the event is deleted automatically at the end of the integrating period. The power supply company can operate the demand monitoring continuously or release or block it with the release signal. All signals present in the tariff control are available as release signal. The meter can accept an exceeding of the demand as described in section 4.14.3.

Running or last mean value

Running mean demand value

Demand threshold

t IP Monitoring of running mean value Monitoring of last mean value

t IP

t IP = Integrating period

Fig. 4.14.3 Running or last mean value


Landis+Gyr 4.14-8 H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Running mean value With the running mean value the event occurs exactly when the mean value exceeds the threshold, i.e. at an unspecified time within the integrating period. The power supply company should therefore use monitoring of the running mean value when there is to be an immediate reaction to exceeding of the threshold. This is particularly the case with load control, where the power supply company wants to pass on the event signal to external devices. The running mean value is less suitable for direct tariff control. Mean value during last integrating period If the power supply company uses demand monitoring for tariff control, it is recommended to monitor the mean value during the last integrating period. In this case the meter only sets the event at the end of the integrating period, i.e. when the new mean value during the last integrating period occurs. The tariff switching is therefore synchronized with the integrating period, which is essential in conjunction with load profiles.

4.14.7

Power factor monitoring


Monitoring of the power factor is only possible in the combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx. The meter can monitor the mean values of power factor with respect to falling below an individually adjustable threshold. If the mean value of power factor falls below the set threshold, the meter immediately sets the event signal "Power factor fallen below" for the relevant measured value. Since each power factor mean value is already determined over the integrating period, no hysteresis is required. The event signal is deleted again automatically at the end of the integrating period. The meter can accept a falling below of the power factor as described in section 4.14.3.

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.14-9

Landis+Gyr 4.14-10

H 71 0200 0031 d en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.15

Security system

H 71 0200 0038 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision. Section 8.3 new. Changes on pages 4 to 6 Security switch S2 instead of S1 New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Sequence of sections adapted, additional clarifications

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.15-2

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.15 4.15.1 4.15.2 4.15.3 4.15.4 4.15.5 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 Introduction _____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security levels ___________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 Security levels and their application __________________________ 4.15-7 Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups _________ 4.15-9

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.15-3

Landis+Gyr 4.15-4

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.15

Security system
This sub-chapter explains the meter security system.

4.15.1

Introduction
The data and parameters of the ZxD meters are protected against inadvertent or improper overwriting by a multi-stage security system. Security system cannot be changed

Note

The security system must be defined when ordering according to the requirements of the power supply company. It can no longer be altered in the field.

4.15.2

Security levels
The ZxD meters feature 16 different security levels (level 0 to 9 and A to F) with different access rights each. A distinction is also made between read access and write access. For each register and each parameter, it can be defined which level is required to read and which level is required to write. All levels are strictly independent i.e. a higher level does not automatically bear all rights of the lower levels. In order to simplify the handling and to ensure compatibility to the ZxD and ZxB meter families, the security characteristics of all levels have been partially or completely fixed.
Access protection for users static passwords P1, Px, .. coded passwords P2, Py, .. Utility seal Reset button R Certification seal Switch S2 free access Communication interfaces Optical interface Internal RS485 interface Interface 1 Comm. unit Interface 2 Comm. unit fixed link parametized link P.. Link with password

Security level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 to Level 14 Manufacturer level

P1

Exteral unit e.g. handheld terminal PC etc.

P2

Px Py P.. P..

Access for manufacturer only

Fig. 4.15.1 Example for the access to the various security levels

It should be noted when using the dims protocol that access is possible at all levels. If the IEC protocol is used exclusively for communication, only the lower 5 levels are available (level 0 level 4).

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

Landis+Gyr 4.15-5

The following security elements can still be selected for some levels: Password (if it is used) Access via the external channels of the communication unit can be enabled or disabled.

4.15.3

Security attributes
The meter and the communication unit feature several access levels with different security attributes. For each access level, the security attributes can be defined that must be fullfilled for a successful data access.

Switches protected by the certification seal

Under the main face plate, protected by the verification seal, there is a block of hardware switches. Their position must be defined in order to gain access to a particular level:

ON ON = Switch closed OFF = Switch open 1 2


3

S1: must always be open (OFF) S2: Parameterisation switch used for reparameterisations. If this switch is closed (ON), flashing arrows appear in the display ( ). S3: not used The position required to gain access must be defined for each level and will be checked by the meter in any case. The status "does not care" is not possible. Unless ordered otherwise, all meters are delivered with open switches (OFF = all switches in the down position) Entering the service menu Passwords It may be defined that access to a certain level will only be granted from the service menu. To enter the service menu the utility seal must be opened. A password may be defined for each access level. In addition, the utility may chose whether a static 8-character password or a coded 7-character password should be used. The password protection may also be disabled for a particular access level. The access to a certain level may be restricted so that it is only granted via selected communication channels. Access is possible via the optical interface, the integrated interface (ZxD300/400 AR only) and both communication channels of the communication unit (ZxD300/400 AT only).

Communication channels

Landis+Gyr 4.15-6

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

4.15.4

Security levels and their application


The table below describes all levels with their security attributes and their typical application.

Level 0 Public Access 1 Data Collection Access possible via dlms and IEC protocol

Security attributes without password without breaking a seal with static password without breaking a seal

Access rights / application examples This access level is always available. All dlms meters can be accessed on this level. All data can be read but there is no write access. Readout of billing data by means of a handheld terminal or possibly by a central station. All billing data are readable. Limited write access possible, e.g. time/date. Installation or maintance tasks in the field. All parameters and all billing data are readable. Limited write access to settable data is possible, e.g. device addresses, identification numbers, phone numbers etc. Installation or maintenance work in the utility. All parameters and all billing data are readable. Write access to settable data is granted, e.g. battery operating time, switching tables etc. Reparameterisation in the utility. All parameters and all billing data are readable. Write access to settable and parameterisable data is granted, e.g register clearing, password setting etc. After the access, a verification is required.

2 Utility Field Service

with coded password without breaking a seal Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password

3 Utility Service

without password breaking the utility seal necessary without password breaking the verification seal necessary

4 Extended Utility Service

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

Landis+Gyr 4.15-7

Level 5

Security attributes with static password

Access rights / application examples Write access for the end user. All parameters and most billing data are readable.

6 Remote Data Collection 7 Remote Service

with static password without breaking a seal no access via the optical interface with static password without breaking a seal no access via the optical interface

Readout of billing data by a central station. All billing data are readable. Limited write access is possible, e.g. time/date. Installation or maintenance work in connection with a central station. All parameters and all billing data are readable. Write access to a limited number of settable data is granted, e.g. switching tables, device addresses, identification numbers, phone numbers etc. Reserved for future expansion.

Access possible only via dlms protocol

8, 9, A, B C Read Administrator with static password without breaking a seal

Allocation of read access rights All parameter and all billing data are readable. Read access rights for all lower levels (0 to B) can be allocated.

D Utility Administrator

with coded password breaking the verification seal necessary access via optical interface only Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password

As level 4. In addition, changes in the utility security system are possible: Read and write access rights can be adapted and all password can be changed. No access is granted via telemetering systems. After the access, a verification is required. Service access of the distributor. Identical to level D. In addition, changing the access rights and the password of the utility administrator is possible. No access is granted via telemetering systems. After the access, a verification is required. Extended service access for certified Landis+Gyr service centres. After the access, a verification is required.

E Distributor Service

with coded password breaking the verification seal necessary access via optical interface only Landis+Gyr Tool required because of coded password

F Manufacturer Service

special conditions breaking the verification seal necessary

Landis+Gyr 4.15-8

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

4.15.5

Allocation of access rights to data and parameter groups


In order to simplify the handling of the access rights, all data and parameters have been grouped. Read and write access rights for the various data and parameter groups can be allocated to the individual security levels.
Parameter group N Parameter group 1 Parameter group 2 Parameter group 3 Configuration and calibration data Access according to special conditions Data and parameter groups parametized link
Data group N

Data group 1

Data group 2

Data group 3

to

Security level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 to Level 14 Manufacturer level

Fig. 4.15.2 Example of access rights of the various data and parameter groups

The allocation is defined by the application in the utility and by the national approval regulations. It must be made when ordering the meter as it cannot be changed later on.

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

to

Landis+Gyr 4.15-9

Landis+Gyr 4.15-10

H 71 0200 0038 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Funktionsweise

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

4.16

Operating messages

H 71 0200 0242 - en

Revision history
Index Date 30.06.2003 Comments First edition

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 4.16-2

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
4.16 4.16.1 4.16.2 4.16.3 Operating messages ______________________________________ 4.16-5 Survey _________________________________________________ 4.16-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 Sending an SMS message __________________________________ 4.16-8

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 4.16-3

Landis+Gyr 4.16-4

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

4.16

Operating messages
This sub-section describes the generation of operating messages and their possible effects (SMS message transmission, display, output contact drive and recording in event log). Operating messages only from software version B21

Note

Only meters with software version B21 or higher can generate operating messages.

4.16.1

Survey
ZMD300/ZxD400 meters can record important events and forward them as so-called operating messages. Operating messages can be used to report important events to the power supply company to enable it to react accordingly and take appropriate action. They can be signalled in the following ways: Transmission of an SMS message (short message) to a specific telephone number (e.g. to the mobile phone of a servicing engineer of the power supply company) Control of an arrow in the display Drive for an output contact Recording in the event log Driving of energy, demand or operating hours registers
Important event Recording of operating message SMS control Sending SMS via GSM modem* * via RS232 interface and external GSM modem or via internal GSM modem of communication unit CU-Gx

Arrow in display

Output contact

Event log

Register drive

Fig. 4.16.1 Signalling of operating messages

SMS messages can be sent either via an RS232 interface (integrated or in communication unit) via an external GSM modem or also directly via the GSM modem integrated in the communication unit CU-Gx.

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.16-5

4.16.2

Recording of operating messages


The power supply company can itself determine by parametrizing which important events are to be recorded as operating messages. The following events can be selected (the event number as defined in the event log is shown in parentheses; refer also to section 4.13.1 "Event log"): Battery charge low (5) Meter reset performed (8) Voltage failure phase L1 (49) Voltage failure phase L2 (50) Voltage failure phase L3 (51) Error "Internal overflow in measuring system" (89) Error "Communication blocked" (94) Value of operating messages

Note

An operating message only states that an important event has taken place. It is not indicated which of the possible sources has led to the message. This can, however, be recorded in the event log by corresponding parametrization.

Sending an SMS message

Operating messages can be used to send an SMS message to any desired telephone number (see section 4.16.3). When an operating message is recorded, an SMS message is transmitted. This can take a little time depending on the quality of the GSM connection or after a number of dialling repeats. Operating messages arriving during this time do not initiate a new SMS message. A new operating message only actuates a further SMS message when one SMS message is fully completed. The recording of an operating message actuates an internal control signal in the meter, which can be used to initiate various meter functions: Control of an arrow in the meter display Drive for an output contact Drive for an energy, demand or operating hours register Recording of the operating message in the event log This internal control signal remains active following the arrival of an operating message, until reset by one of the following actions: By a corresponding control instruction, which can be supplied to the meter by the MAP120 service tool. This can, for example, be performed on the spot by the service engineer or via modem by the service department. By a reset if the meter is parametrized so that operating messages are reset.

Operation of a meter function

Landis+Gyr 4.16-6

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

While the internal control signal is active, further operating messages have no effect. The event log can therefore only record an operating message again, for example, when the preceding message has been reset. The internal control signal is also not reset by a voltage failure. Example The following diagram shows an example of interaction between operating messages, SMS control and the internal control signal. In this example three SMS messages are sent per operating message (can be parametrized from 1 to 5) at a time interval t (can be parametrized from 1 to 255 mins.).
Further operating message has no effect, since an SMS message already sent MAP Further operating message is recorded Operating message is reset with MAP120 or by a reset - internal control signal is reset - any SMS message in progress is ended

Operating message recorded

MAP Time t between dialling repeats (1 - 255 mins) 1 t 2 t

SMS message is actuated

SMS message was sent 3 t

Further SMS message actuated 1 2 t

Sending of a test SMS message to check installation - no dialling repeat - only one transmission test - internal control signal not set

Up to three transmission tests per SMS message

Defective SMS transmissions can be recorded in event log

Internal control signal set

The internal control signal is not influenced, since this is already set

Control of an arrow in the display Drive for an output contact Drive for an energy, demand or operating hours register Entry in event log

Fig. 4.16.2 Example: meter behaviour with operating messages

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.16-7

4.16.3

Sending an SMS message


Operating messages can be used to send SMS messages via a GSM modem. An SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization is sent to a telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametrization. For example the equipment number of the meter can be sent to the mobile phone number of the service department of the power supply company, so that the service department knows that an important event has taken place at the meter specified.

SMS control

The "SMS control" provides the following functions: Initializing of the GSM modem used by a corresponding AT instruction, provided it concerns an external GSM modem using no control conductors. Transmission of an SMS message pre-defined by the parametrization to any desired telephone number similarly pre-defined by the parametrization. This information is supplied to the GSM modem in the form of an AT instruction. If for any reason the GSM modem does not acknowledge a successful SMS transmission (no Acknowledge), three attempts are made to send the SMS message. It can be determined by parametrization how many SMS messages are to be sent per operating event (maximum five dialling repeats). The time between repeats of the SMS message can also be set by the parametrization (1 to 255 minutes). A test SMS message can be sent to check the connection with the service department after installation of the meter. If there is a voltage failure in the meter shortly after the recording of an operating message, before the SMS message could be fully transmitted, this condition is stored in the meter. When the meter is switched on again, the SMS message is completed following a waiting time of 2 minutes. If, for example, three dialling repeats are parametrized per operating message, but only the first message could be sent before the voltage failure, the two outstanding SMS messages are sent after restoration of the voltage. If for any reason an SMS message could not be sent (because for example no connection could be made via the GSM network), this can be recorded in the event log depending on the parametrization. Following a faulty SMS transmission the first successful SMS transmission (e.g. after restoration of operating readiness of the GSM network) can similarly be recorded in the event log.

Landis+Gyr 4.16-8

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

ZxD300/400xR

In ZxD300/400xR meters with an integral RS232 interface an external GSM modem can be connected to this interface to send an SMS message.
Integrated RS232 interface

GSM modem

Fig. 4.16.3 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xR meters

ZxD300/400xT

In ZxD300/400xT meters a communication unit CU-Gx with internal GSM modem, or CU-Ax or CU-Bx with RS232 interface, to which an external GSM modem is connected, can be selected for sending SMS messages.
Communication unit CU-Gx with GSM modem

Communication unit with RS232 interface

GSM modem

Fig. 4.16.4 Sending SMS messages by ZxD300/400xT meters

The following boundary conditions must be satisfied to ensure communication between the meter and an external GSM modem for this application: The meter must communicate with the external GSM modem via an RS232 interface. The external GSM modem must be operated in so-called "transparent mode" if: - the external GSM modem is connected to an RS232 interface without control conductors (with integrated communication for the ZxD300/ 400xR) - or if the control conductors of the RS232 interface of the communication unit are not used. The maximum bit rate at the RS232 interface must be set by parametrization to the communication speed of the external GSM modem. The RS232 interface must have either the auto-detection function parametrized for the bit rate or in case of communication according to IEC 62056-21 the start bit rate parametrized the same as the maximum bit rate.

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.16-9

The AT instructions used must have 7 bits fixed, even parity. Further information concerning operation of ZxD meters with GSM modems can be found in the following documents: User manuals for the various communication units: - CU-Ax: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0044 en - CU-Bx: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0045 en - CU-Gx: .............................................................. H 71 0200 0046 en Basic information for communication applications ............................... H 71 0200 0145 en Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media: - Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem .......................................... H 71 0200 0147 en - Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ....... H 71 0200 0149 en - Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) ......... H 71 0200 0150 en Initializing external GSM modem with an AT instruction If an external GSM modem is connected in transparent mode to the RS232 interface of the meter (for ZxDxxxxR or if the control conductors of the communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx for ZxDxxxxT are not used for control of the GSM modem), the GSM modem must be initialized by an AT instruction. Any desired AT instruction of maximum length 40 characters can be parametrized in the meter for this initializing. The initializing can also consist of several, individual AT instructions, which are concluded in each case with <0D> (carriage return). With the MAP120 service tool the initializing instruction can be parametrized in the meter. The valid initializing instructions for a specific GSM modem can be found in the manual for the relevant GSM modem. Treatment of AT instructions

Note

AT instructions are treated as ASCII character sequence (string). The initializing instruction for a GSM modem generally consists of two AT instructions as shown by the following example: ATZ<0D>AT+CMGF=1<0D> The two AT instructions have the following significance: ATZ AT+CMGF=1 Reset of GSM modem (previous initializings are cancelled) The GSM modem is operated in string mode

Landis+Gyr 4.16-10

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Parametrizing communication units

Note

When using communication unit CU-Gx (with integral GSM modem) or communication unit CU-Ax or CU-Bx (RS232 interface with control conductors and external GSM modem) the GSM modem is initialized by the corresponding control signals of the communication unit. The communication unit must be parametrized for this purpose (see relevant application notes). In this case no AT instruction must be parametrized to initialize the GSM modem in the meter, but a blank initializing string must be parametrized in the meter. The telephone number to which the SMS message is to be sent and the text of the SMS message are combined in a single AT instruction. This can be parametrized in the meter with the MAP120 service tool. This AT instruction can consist of maximum 60 characters with the following structure: AT+CMGS="+41vvnnnnnnn"<0D>xxxxxxxxx<1A> The individual parts of the AT instruction have the following significance: AT +CMGS= Introduction of AT instruction (Attention) Communication instruction for the GSM modem

Determination of telephone number and SMS message

"+41vvnnnnnnn" Telephone number of SMS recipient with country code (+41 for Switzerland), code vv without preceding zero (e.g. 79) and 7-digit call number nnnnnnn (e.g. 1234567). The telephone number must be limited by initial and concluding characters. <0D> xxxxxxxxx Carriage Return Text of SMS message. This can comprise any desired sequence of characters (without initial and concluding characters) with the equipment number of the meter generally entered. A special code defined by the power supply company, which for example defines the current location of the meter, can also be entered. Concluding character (CTRL-Z)

<1A>

The waiting time between transmission of the telephone number and the SMS message to the GSM modem is one second. The waiting time for acknowledgement from the GSM modem that the SMS has been sent is 15 seconds. The telephone number and the text of the SMS message are thereby permanently stored in the meter and can only be modified by reparametrization. It is not therefore possible to send different SMS messages dependent on one event. The SMS recipient, for example the service department of the power supply company, can see from the meter number sent or the code of the power supply company for the location of the meter, which meter has sent the SMS message and can then take appropriate action.

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Landis+Gyr 4.16-11

Test SMS message

Following installation, for example, a test SMS message can be sent with the aid of the MAP120 service tool to check the correct function of the meter and GSM modem. The installer can send any SMS message to any desired telephone number (for example to his own mobile phone) to verify that the installation is configured correctly. The AT instruction for the test SMS message has the same structure as the AT instruction previously described for specifying the telephone number and the SMS message. The test SMS message is only sent once, however, and in the event that the GSM modem is not ready or cannot make connection in the GSM network, no further attempts at transmission are made.

Status report of SMS message

The SMS controller generates a status report, which can be read out at any time with the MAP120 service tool. The current status of the SMS controller can be checked in this way. The status report can contain the following information: SMS transmission was successful (1) SMS transmission was not successful (0) GSM modem is busy (2) Incompatible communication unit: communication unit cannot send an SMS message (4)

Landis+Gyr 4.16-12

H 71 0200 0242 - en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Function

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

Control elements and displays

H 71 0200 0035 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Changes on pages 1, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12 and 13 Document also valid for ZxD310CT New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Chapter 5.3.1: Reference added to possibility of limiting to active values in the rolling operating display.

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 5-2

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.4 Control elements and displays__________________________5-5 Control elements ____________________________________________ 5-5 Display buttons _____________________________________________ 5-5 Control of display via optical interface ___________________________ 5-5 Reset button _______________________________________________ 5-6 Liquid crystal display _________________________________________ 5-7 Introduction ________________________________________________ 5-7 Basic layout ________________________________________________ 5-7 Index system _______________________________________________ 5-9 Types of display ____________________________________________ 5-10 Operating display ___________________________________________ 5-10 Display list ________________________________________________ 5-11 Service list ________________________________________________ 5-14 Optical test output __________________________________________ 5-16

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 5-3

Landis+Gyr 5-4

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Control elements and displays


This chapter describes the appearance, layout and function of all operating elements and displays of the meters ZMD300xx and ZxD400xx. Illustrations

Note

The illustrations of the face plate and display in this section always show the ZMD300Cx or ZxD400Cx combimeter (with additional optical test output for reactive energy, together with direction of reactive power and quadrant display).

5.1

Control elements
The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx meters have the two display buttons "down" and "up" and a reset button as conventional operating elements. The display can also be controlled with the aid of a light source via the optical interface.

5.1.1

Display buttons
The two display buttons "down" and "up" are placed on the main face plate (top) on the right of the liquid crystal display.
Landis+Gyr Dialog
Readout

Cl. 1

imp kvarh

500

imp kWh

Cl. 1

Three-phase four-wire meter No 69 832 138 ZMD410CT41.4207 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 1999

Display button "up" Display button "down"

T1 T2 T3

SET Test

Fig. 5.1

Display buttons

By pressing the lower display button "down", the display changes to the next value in the list. By pressing the upper display button "up", the display changes to the previous value (refer also to 5.3.2 "Display list").

5.1.2

Control of display via optical interface


All meters of the ZxD series have an "optical button" in addition to the "up" and "down" display buttons. The optical interface serves to receive a light signal, e.g. generated by a torch. The light signal acts like the "down" display button and controls the display in one direction from one value to the next. This type of display control only functions when voltage is supplied to the meter. The reader can also control the display at a distance from the meter depending on the light intensity from the source, e.g. through a protective glass disc in front of the meter.

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-5

5.1.3

Reset button
The reset button is situated to the right of the battery compartment under the front door. To permit operation of the reset button the front door must be opened and therefore the factory seal removed. The reset button is normally used to perform a manual reset. If the display check is displayed, however, pressing of the reset button produces the service menu (refer also to 5.3.3 "Service list").

Battery compartment

Reset button

Communication unit (only with ZMD300xT or ZxD400xT)

Fig. 5.2

Reset button under front door

Landis+Gyr 5-6

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

5.2
5.2.1

Liquid crystal display


Introduction
The meters ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx are provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD). The display can be provided with background lighting for easier reading (optional). This is switched on by pressing one of the display buttons and is extinguished automatically after a short time if no further button is pressed.

5.2.2

Basic layout
The basic layout shows all the indication possibilities of the liquid crystal display.
1 2 21 3 4 5

8
Fig. 5.3 Basic layout of the liquid crystal display (LCD) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Active power direction (+P: import, -P: export) Reactive power direction (not used with ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax) Phase voltages (flash if rotating field reversed) Battery status (charge voltage) Units field Index field (8 digits) Value field (8 digits) 12 arrow symbols for status information (e.g. tariffs)

Active power direction

Shows always the sum of the three phases: positive active energy direction (imported from power company) negative active energy direction (exported to power company) negative active energy direction of individual phases (second arrow flashes), but only in the M circuit (ZMD300xx / ZMD400xx).

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-7

Reactive power direction

Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx always the sum of the three phases (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax). positive reactive energy direction negative reactive energy direction

Quadrant display

Indicates for combimeters ZMD300Cx / ZxD400Cx in which quadrants the present measurement is made (not used for active energy meters ZMD300Ax / ZxD400Ax): 1. Quadrant 2. Quadrant 3. Quadrant 4. Quadrant

Phase voltages

Indication of presence of phase voltages. If the rotating field corresponds to that given by the parametrizing, symbols L1, L2 and L3 are continuously lit. Otherwise they flash every second. The symbol appears if the charge voltage of the battery fitted is too low (provided the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery"). The following units are shown: W, var, VA, k..., M..., ...h, V, A, h, Hz, m (var and VA only for combimeters) Up to 8-digit indices are displayed, which define the value in the value field. Up to 8-digit values are displayed.

Battery condition

Units field

Index field

Value field

Arrow symbols

An arrow symbol is an additional status indication for tariffs, reset block, test mode, etc. The arrow points to a status description on the face plate.

Landis+Gyr 5-8

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

5.2.3

Index system
The information concerning which data are shown in the display is made with an index system and is supported by the unit over the value field. The 8-digit index field permits all previously known index systems such as DIN, LG, VEOe, OBIS, etc. The B:C.D.E.F structure applies to OBIS (Object Identification System): B Defines the channel number, i.e. the number of the input of a metering equipment having several inputs for the measurement of energy of the same or different types (e.g. in data concentrators, registration units). This enables data from different sources to be identified. Defines the abstract or physical data items related to the information source concerned, e.g. active power, reactive power, apparent power, cos, current or voltage. Defines types, or the result of the processing of physical quantities according to various specific algorithms. The algorithms can deliver energy and demand quantities as well as other physical quantities. Defines the further processing of measurement results to tariff registers, according to the tariffs in use. For abstract data or for measurement results for which tariffs are not relevant, this value group can be used for further classification. Defines the storage of data according to different billing periods. Where this is not relevant, this value group can be used for further classification.

To simplify the reading in the index field, individual parts of the OBIS code can be omitted. The abstract or physical data C and type of data D must be shown. Examples 1.8.0 1 = Active energy import (all phases) 8 = Status 0 = Total 0.9.1 Local time Reference is made for examples to the following display list and the readout log (refer to chapter 6 "Communication interfaces").

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-9

5.3

Types of display
The ZMD300xx / ZxD400xx has the following three types of display: Operating display The values specified by the parametrizing are shown as a rolling display in the operating display. The display is always in operating mode when the display buttons are not operated. The meter returns automatically from the display list to the operating display after a defined time. This can consists of one or more values. Display list This comprises all values, which appear in the display after pressing a button. The values themselves and also the sequence can be parametrized. The display buttons permit scrolling up and down in the list. Service list The user can set the meter to service mode by pressing the reset button starting from the display check. An extended display list the service list is available there with additional values.

5.3.1

Operating display
The values always displayed are considered the operating display. This can be parametrized as fixed display (only one value present, e.g. the present tariff) or as rolling display (several values alternate at a fixed rate, e.g. every 15 seconds).
running mean value with status of integrating period

Fig. 5.4

Example of a fixed display

Limiting to active values in rolling operating display

Note

In meters with software version B21 or higher it is possible by parametrization to limit the rolling display to active values. This helps to keep the rolling display clear, e.g. in meters with numerous energy and demand registers. The meter can generate an error message on the basis of self-tests. According to parametrization, this can be permanently included in the operating display. In the event of a fatal error, it replaces the normal operating display and the meter no longer operates.

Error message

Fig. 5.5

Example of an error message (unsufficent battery voltage)

In case of an error message the procedure described in chapter 9 "Error measages and measures in event of faults" should be followed.
Landis+Gyr 5-10 H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

5.3.2

Display list
Operating display , D isplay check , Display menu , , * Values + R Service menu

Display list

Value 1 , * , *

Data profile

Values

Value 2 , * Value n , * + , *

Event log + End

Values

End

, = press "up" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "down" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "up" button longer (> 2 s) = press "down" button longer (> 2 s)
Fig. 5.6 Display list survey

, R = press reset button + = together , = as required (or) * = main values only

Display check

Brief operation (< 2s) of the display button "down" or "up" causes change of the operating display, e.g.:

to the display check:

All segments of the display are operated here. The index and value fields should be checked each time for missing segments. This can prevent incorrect readings.

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-11

Display menu

Pressing the display button "down" or "up" again briefly changes to the display menu or directly to the display list. The first menu item appears, e.g. "Display list" (standard data):

The menu item only appears when several menu items exist. Otherwise direct entry is made to the display list. The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button, e.g. "Data profile", "Event log" etc. The first menu item appears again after the last item. The preceding menu item is displayed again by briefly pressing the "up" display button. Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the display menu. Value display The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds), normally the error message:

The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value. The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization. A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed, but no stored values. Examples of values in a display list:
Reset counter

Date of resetting stored value 03 (March)

Cumulated maximum demand active power

Landis+Gyr 5-12

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Active energy present status

Reactive energy present status

Battery hours counter

Status of signals at control terminals

Present voltage phase 1

Present current phase 1

Number of total voltage failures

To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list.

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-13

Load profile

The "Load profile" menu item for selection in the display menu (denoted P.01) is shown as follows:

The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Navigation within the load profile display takes place as described in section 4.13.2 "Load profile".

5.3.3

Service list
Operating display , D isplay check R Service menu , , * Values + , Display menu

Service list

Value 1 , * , *

Set mode

Values

Value 2 , * Value n , * + , *

Others + End

Values

End

, = press "up" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "down" button briefly (< 2 s) = press "up" button longer (> 2 s) = press "down" button longer (> 2 s)
Fig. 5.7 Service mode survey

, R = press reset button + = together , = as required (or) * = main values only

Landis+Gyr 5-14

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Service menu

Pressing the reset button during the display check changes the display to the service menu or directly to the service list. The first menu item appears, e.g. "Service list" (service data):

The menu item only appears if there are several items present. Otherwise direct entry is made to the service list. The next menu item appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button, e.g. "Set mode", "Test mode on/off", etc. The first item appears again following the last menu item "End". The preceding menu item appears again by pressing the "up" button briefly. Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the service menu. Value display The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds) (as for the display list) The next list value appears for every further brief operation of the "down" display button. Brief operation of the "up" button again displays the preceding value. The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parametrization. A rapid run is started by holding down the display button "down" or "up" (at least 2 seconds). The main values of the list are then displayed while the button remains pressed, but no stored values. To return to the menu level from the list at the end of the display list press the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Both display buttons ("down" and "up") must be pressed simultaneously to return to the operating display from the list. Set mode Values can be changed in the value display of the set mode with the aid of the reset button and display buttons (for setting time and date, identification numbers, battery hours counter, etc.). The procedure is described under "Changing values in set mode" in chapter 8.4. The "Event profile" menu item for selection in the service or display menu (denoted P.98) is shown as follows:

Event log

The first value of the load profile is displayed by pressing the display button "down" or "up" for longer (at least 2 seconds). Navigation within the event profile display takes place as described in section 4.13.1 "Event log".

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Landis+Gyr 5-15

5.4

Optical test output


The optical test outputs one for active energy in all meters and a second for reactive energy in combimeters are fitted in the main face plate above the liquid crystal display.

Landis+Gyr Dialog
Readout

Cl. 1

imp kvarh

500

imp kWh

Cl. 1

Three-phase four-wire meter No 69 832 138 ZMD410CT41.4207 50 Hz 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A 2003

Optical test output reactive energy (combimeters only)

T1 T2 T3

SET Test

Optical test output active energy

Fig. 5.8

Optical test outputs

The optical test outputs are used for testing the meter. They transmit visible red pulses corresponding to the current measured values (active and reactive energy). See also chapter 8 "Maintenance and service".

Landis+Gyr 5-16

H 71 0200 0035 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Control elements and displays

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT ZFD400 AT / CT USER MANUAL

Communication interfaces

H 71 0200 0247 - en

Revision history
Index Date 31.03.2003 Comments First edition

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 6-2

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.9 Communication interfaces ____________________________ 6-5 Survey ____________________________________________________ 6-5 Optical interface _____________________________________________ 6-6 S0 interface ________________________________________________ 6-6 RS232 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 RS485 interface _____________________________________________ 6-7 CS interface ________________________________________________ 6-8 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________ 6-9 Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107) _____________________ 6-10 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Further information sources about communication interfaces ________ 6-13

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 6-3

Landis+Gyr 6-4

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Table of contents

Communication interfaces
This section describes the functions and application possibilities of all communication interfaces of the ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters and indicates the possibilities for data readout.

6.1

Survey
The ZMD300xT and ZxD400xT meters have an optical interface for communication on the spot via a read head using a wide range of communication interfaces. for remote scanning of meters (RS232, RS485, CS, M-Bus, PSTN modem, GSM modem etc.) or for recording metering pulses for other physical media, such as water, gas or heat (S0 interface). The communication devices are accommodated in an easily exchanged communication unit, which is plugged in under the front door of the meter and secured by a factory seal. It can be fitted and removed at any time in the field without touching the calibration seal. An initial fitting as well as retrofitting without re-parametrizing of the meters is possible with any version of communication unit. For fitting and removal of the already parametrized communication units the installation personnel do not require any special knowledge of communications. Modern plug connections ensure a rapid and faultless connection of the communication units.

CO Rx Tx

99
N Kle Te mme rm n Co ina decke uvr l co l e ve A C born r e
DC 10 0 -2 30 +

99

90 01 -2

CU -G 4
+ -

is +

S01

La

ia lo

gC U-

G4

Fig. 6.1

Simple fitting of the communication unit

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

RS485

Gy

rD

S02

nd

V~

Landis+Gyr 6-5

Versions

The following versions of communication units (CU) are currently available, divided into five basic versions: Communication units CU-Ax with RS232, CS and S0 interfaces Communication units CU-Bx with RS485, RS232 and S0 interfaces Communication units CU-Dx with M-Bus Communication units CU-Mx with PSTN modem(V.22bis or V.34), RS485 and S0 interfaces Communication units CU-Gx with GSM modem, RS232, RS485 and S0 interfaces The relevant version is designated with a number inserted instead of "x" (e.g. CU-A1, CU-B2, CU-M4, CU-G5).

6.2

Optical interface
The optical interface to IEC 62056-21 is a serial, bi-directional interface. It is situated at top right on the main face plate (see also chapter 3 "Mechanical constuction") and serves: for automatic data recording on the spot by means of suitable acquisition unit (hand-held terminal) (see section 6.8.1) for performing service functions, e.g. to input formatted commands (see section 8.3) as "optical key", i.e. as receiver of a light signal, e.g. generated by a flashlight acting like the "down" call-up button (refer also to section 5.1.2 "Display control via optical interface"). for communication with a Landis+Gyr MAP120 service tool or a Landis+Gyr MAP190 parametrization editor tool. The technical data for the optical interface are given in section 2.2.12 "Serial interface".

6.3

S0 interface
The S0 interface (pulse input) serves to accept external pulse transmitters (e.g. other meters with transmit contact for fixed valency pulses) for processing in the meter. 2 S0 interfaces are provided in each of the communication units CU-A1, CU-B1, CU-D2, CU-M1, CU-G4 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual). The technical data for the S0 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with S0 interface.

Landis+Gyr 6-6

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

6.4

RS232 interface
The RS232 interface is an asymmetric, serial, asynchronous, bi-directional interface. It is present in the communication units CU-A1, CU-A2, CU-A5, CU-B1, CU-B4, CU-G3 and CU-G5 (see corresponding user manual) and serves: for the connection of an external modem (intelligent or transparent), e.g. for remote reading of meter data or performance of service functions from a central station to provide a direct connection to the RS232 interface of a computer. The RS232 interface of the communication unit is available in 2 different versions: as basic version without control lines for the connection of an external modem with sufficient intelligence of its own or as extended version with control lines for the connection of a transparent external modem. The use of this version has the following advantages: - Application of commercially available modem possible without difficulty - Maximum possible baud rate can be used without danger of buffer overflow - Limiting of maximum connection and idle time possible - Optimum behaviour with poor connections - Support of time-windows. The technical data for the RS232 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS232 interface.

6.5

RS485 interface
The RS485 interface is a serial bi-directional interface. It is present in the communication units CU-B1, CU-B2, CU-B4, CU-M1, CU-M4, CU-G1 and CUG4 (see corresponding user manual). Up to 32 locally installed meters can be connected for example via the RS485 interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.). The technical data for the RS485 interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with RS485 interface.

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Landis+Gyr 6-7

6.6

CS interface
The CS interface is a serial, bi-directional, passive current interface (current loop). It is present in communication units CU-A1, CU-A2 and CU-A4 (see corresponding user manual). Up to 4 locally installed meters can be connected via the CS interface to a bus system and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.). The technical data for the CS interface are given in the user manuals for the above-mentioned communication units with CS interface.

6.7

M-Bus interface
The serial M-bus interface is present in communication unit CU-D2 (see corresponding user manual). With the M-Bus interface up to 250 devices (electricity, water, gas or heat meters) can be connected via a repeater to a communication path in order to read out the meter data or perform service functions (such as setting start values, time/date, etc.). The use of the M-Bus physical layers (the M-Bus protocol is not used) has compared with the customary use of a RS485 bus the advantage, that an already existing M-Bus infrastructure can be further used, i.e. no new cabling is necessary. The technical data for the M-bus interface are given in the user manual for the communication unit CU-D2.

Landis+Gyr 6-8

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

6.8

Possibilities for data readout


The power supply company can record the data stored in the meter on the spot at any time in two ways: Reading the liquid crystal display of the meter. Only those data can be recorded which appear in the rolling operating display or can be selected with the call-up button. Automatic data readout via the optical interface according to 6.8.1 with the aid of a hand held terminal) or other readout device (e.g. laptop). Further data are then accessible depending on the parametrization. Readout data

Note

For readout to IEC 62056-21 all data determined by the parametrization are read out in the specified sequence. For readout according to DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) the data requested by the readout unit are read out. If the meter is fitted with the appropriate communication unit (see associated separate operating instruction) remote scanning of the meter data is also possible.

6.8.1

Data readout via optical interface


Procedure: 1. 2. 3. Start the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). Connect the cable of the reading head to the hand held terminal. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically downwards). The reading head is held magnetically. Start the data readout on the hand held terminal (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). Remove the reading head from the meter again after completing the readout.

4. 5.

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Landis+Gyr 6-9

6.8.2

Readout to IEC 62056-21 (former IEC 1107)


The data read out according to IEC 62056-21 are recorded in the form shown below. The scope and sequence of values in the log is determined by the parametrization. Log example
/LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 F.F (00000000) 0.0.1 (417242) 0.1.0 (28) 0.1.2.04 (98-05-01 00:00) 1.2.1 (26068.7*kW) 1.2.2 (15534.8*kW) 1.6.1 (192.4*kW)(00-05-06 10:45) 1.6.1*04 (202.4)(00-04-22 09:30) 1.6.2 (086.7*kW)(00-05-04 22:30) 1.6.2*04 (100.9)(00-04-14 23:00) 1.8.1 (0244948*kWh) 1.8.1*04 (0234520) 1.8.2 (0082520*kWh) 1.8.2*04 (0078197) 5.8.1 (0106103*kvarh) 5.8.1*04 (0100734) 5.8.2 (0039591*kvarh) 5.8.2*04 (0036152) 1.8.0 (0327468*kWh) 5.8.0 (0145694*kvarh) 8.8.0 (0001452*kvarh) 0.9.1 (14:18:06) 0.9.2 (00-05-20) C.7.0 (00087) C.72.0 (00157) C.73.0 (00000) C.74.0 (00306) C.3.0 (500) C.3.1 (500) C.2.1 (00-03-26) !

Significance
Designation of meter (reply on transmit request) Error message 1st identification number Number of resets Time of last reset P max cumulated P max cumulated P max present with April stored value P max present with April stored value Active energy (import) with April stored value Active energy (import) with April stored value Reactive energy (inductive) with April stored value Reactive energy (inductive) with April stored value Total active energy Total reactive energy (inductive) Total reactive energy (capacitive) Time-of-day of readout Date of readout No. of voltage failures of all phases Number of undervoltages Number of overvoltages Number of overloads (overcurrent) Active pulse constant Reactive pulse constant Date of last parametrization End of log Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2 Tariff 1 Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 2

Landis+Gyr 6-10

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Notes

The power supply company can select by parametrizing between a standard identification or its own identification. The standard identification has the following structure: /LGZ... /LGZ 4... /LGZ4 \2... /LGZ4\2 ZMD410... /LGZ4\2ZMD410 41... /LGZ4\2ZMD41041 00... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr) Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter Meter Type of measuring unit Basic version tariff section Additional functions (RCR, supplementary power supply) Software version The hyphen following the identification number and the tariff (1.6.1) denotes the type of resetting: *04 &04 Resetting made internally or remote controlled Resetting performed manually or with reset button R

/LGZ4\2ZMD4104100 .B14 Stored values

e.g. 1.6.1*04 e.g. 1.6.1&04

Identification by the power supply company itself uses an identification number. ID1.1 (designation of ownership by the power supply company), ID1.2 (any desired number) or ID2.1 (serial number) are available. The identification is comprised as follows in this case: /LGZ... /LGZ 4... /LGZ4 \2... /LGZ4\2 \B14... /LGZ4\2\B14 12345678 Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr) Baud rate 4 = 4800 Baud Extended communication possibility 2 = DLMS-compatible meter Meter Software version Identification number specified by parametrizing (maximum 8 characters)

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Landis+Gyr 6-11

6.8.3

Readout to DLMS
While the readout according to IEC 62056-21 uses a protocol determined in advance, readout to DLMS enables the power supply company to configure the values to be read out individually. The company therefore has systematic access to specific values without being influenced by other values not required.

DLMS specification

Various meter manufacturers including Landis+Gyr together with related organizations, have compiled the language specification DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) and undertaken to use this in their equipment (meters, tariff units, systems, etc.). The objective of DLMS is to use a common language for data exchange in the energy measurement and other sectors. In addition to end units such as meters, tariff units, etc. DLMS also concerns the interfaces, transmission channels and system software. DLMS can be compared to sending a letter: the sender writes the address of the recipient on the letter and hands it to the post office for transport. The way in which the postal department transports the letter is of no consequence to the sender and receiver. The only important thing is that the address of the recipient is clearly shown and that the letter is received, read and it can be seen from whom the letter originates. Units with DLMS operate in a similar way. They provide the values - termed items - required by the receiver (e.g. control centre) and pass them via interface to the transport medium (channel). How the values reach the recipient is again immaterial for both parties.

Objective

Principle

DLMS items

DLMS is an item-oriented language. The DLMS items have an unmistakable name in the form of the EDIS identification number contain the value in an exactly defined form and are configured in a similarly exactly defined format. Items of this kind are number of resets with date and time, cumulative maxima, rolling mean values, maxima, energy statuses, associated stored values, etc. The sender feeds these items to a transport medium, e.g. the telephone network. This transmits them to the receiver, so that the items are received in the same form as supplied by the sender.

Landis+Gyr 6-12

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

6.9

Further information sources about communication interfaces


More detailed information about Landis+Gyr Dialog communication solutions can be found in the following documents. Product information for the various communication units: - CU-Ax: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0099 en - CU-Bx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0100 en - CU-Dx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0231 en - CU-Mx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0101 en - CU-Gx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0105 en User manuals for the various communication units: - CU-Ax: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0044 en - CU-Bx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0045 en - CU-Dx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0232 en - CU-Mx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0047 en - CU-Gx: ............................................................. H 71 0200 0046 en Basic information for communication applications .............................. H 71 0200 0145 en Detailed application notes for numerous reference applications with various communication units for different transmission media: - Point-to-point connection with internal PSTN modem ....................................... H 71 0200 0146 en - Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "US Robotics 56k" ........... H 71 0200 0148 en - Point-to-point connection with external PSTN modem "ELSA MicroLink ISDN" .... H 71 0200 0151 en - Point-to-point connection with internal GSM modem ......................................... H 71 0200 0147 en - Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "ZDUE-GSM-PLUS III" ...... H 71 0200 0149 en - Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (RS232) ........ H 71 0200 0150 en - Point-to-point connection with external GSM modem "Metcom T" (CS) .............. H 71 0200 0153 en - Point-to-point connection with external IP converter "MetcomTE2" ................... H 71 0200 0152 en - Multiple connections with RS485 interfaces ....................................... H 71 0200 0154 en - Multiple connections with CS interfaces ............................................. H 71 0200 0155 en

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Landis+Gyr 6-13

- Multiple connections with M-Bus interfaces ........................................ H 71 0200 0156 en The range of application notes of this kind available is being continually enlarged. All these documents as well as advisory services are available from the competent representative of Landis+Gyr Ltd.

Landis+Gyr 6-14

H 71 0200 0247 - en - ZMD300 AT / CT - ZMD400 AT / CT - ZFD400 AT / CT - User Manual Communication interfaces

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 USER MANUAL

Installation and commissioning

H 71 0200 0061 f en

Revision history
Index a b c d e f Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Text adaptations after internal revision Various corrections ZMD310CT with I max of 120 A ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2 Section 7.7 "Commissioning and functional check" supplemented by check of communication device with test SMS message

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 7-2

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 Installation and commissioning ________________________7-5 Introduction ________________________________________________ 7-5 Material and tools required ____________________________________ 7-5 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Connection with 3 phases and neutral ___________________________ 7-6 Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit) _____________ 7-6 Mounting the meter __________________________________________ 7-7 Connecting meter ___________________________________________ 7-9 Check of connections________________________________________ 7-12 Commissioning and functional check ___________________________ 7-13

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 7-3

Landis+Gyr 7-4

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Table of contents

Installation and commissioning


This chapter describes the installation and connection of meters for direct connection. In addition, the necessary steps for checking the connections, commissioning of the meter and the final functional check are described. Dangerous voltage

Danger

Dangers can arise from live electrical installations to which the meters are connected. Touching live parts is dangerous to life. All safety information should therefore be strictly observed without fail.

7.1

Introduction
The following personal and technical conditions must be fulfilled for installation and commissioning of the meters: The work described below must only be performed by technically qualified and suitably trained persons. These persons must be familiar with and observe the normal local safety regulations. Strictly observe the details in chapter 1 "Safety", in particular the safety regulations, as well as all information concerning safe operation in this chapter. Before starting work check that the material and tools required are all present (as in chapter 7.2).

7.2

Material and tools required


The following material and tools are required for installation of the meters: Correct meter (according to type designation and characteristic data on the face plate) with intact meter seal (calibration seals) Correct meter connection diagram (on the rear side of the tariff face plate) Fixing screws for fitting the meters on meter boards or similar device Company seals Screwdriver suitable for fixing screws Size 1 screwdriver for screwless spring-loaded terminals Screwdriver suitable for thrust screws of phase connections Sealing pliers for company own seals Drilling machine for fixing holes if necessary Phase tester or universal measuring instrument Buzzer

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

Landis+Gyr 7-5

7.3

Basic information for connecting meter


It is recommended to use the following circuits whenever possible for connecting the meter to the various voltage levels.

7.3.1

Connection with 3 phases and neutral


L1 L2 L3 N Connecting fuses Consumer fuses
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12

Loads

Fig. 7.1

Connection with 3 phases and neutral

Neutral

The neutral is normally looped through terminals 10 and 12. Some power supply companies, however, make a simple connection between terminal 10 or 12 and the neutral. This avoids possible contact errors in the neutral conductor.

7.3.2

Connection with 3 phases without neutral (Aron circuit)


A version ZFD300xx for the rarely encountered three-phase networks without neutral with 3 x 230 V is not foreseen.

Landis+Gyr 7-6

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

7.4

Mounting the meter


Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work, so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed. The meter should be mounted as follows on the meter board or similar device provided for this purpose (see also figure "Meter dimensions" in chapter 2.2 "Technical data"): 1. 2. 3. 4. Find the correct meter position for mounting the meter. Determine the desired form of fixing (open or covered meter mounting). Set the meter suspension eyelet in the relevant position. This can be moved up or down over the stop as illustrated below. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live. If so, remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.
open Case edge 206

covered

190

Raise latch slightly and push down over stop

Stop

Fig 7.2

Meter suspension eyelet

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

Landis+Gyr 7-7

5.

Mark the three fixing points (suspension triangle as in following illustration) on the mounting surface provided: - horizontal base of suspension triangle = 150 mm - height of suspension triangle for open mounting = 206 mm - height of suspension triangle for covered mounting = 190 mm

75 mm

150 mm

Fig. 7.3

Drilling plan

6. 7. 8.

Drill the three holes for the fixing screws. Unscrew the meter terminal cover. Fit the meter with the three fixing screws on the mounting surface provided.

Landis+Gyr 7-8

206 or 190 mm respectively

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

7.5

Connecting meter
Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The connecting conductors at the point of installation must be voltage-free for installation of the meter. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant preliminary fuses should therefore be removed and kept in a safe place until finishing work, so that they cannot be re-inserted by other persons unnoticed. Connecting conductor cross-section

Note

ZMD310CT with a maximum current of 100 or 120 A require connecting conductors of 35 mm2 cross-section. Owing to the terminal opening of 9.5 mm only cable is possible. The electrical connections to the meter should be made as follows according to the connection diagram: 1. Check with a phase tester or universal measuring instrument whether the connecting wires are live. If so, remove the corresponding consumer fuses and keep them in a safe place until installation is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed.

Connecting the phase connection lines 2. 3. Shorten the phase connecting wires to the required length and then strip them. Insert the phase connecting wires in the relevant terminals (the terminals are numbered as shown in the connection diagram) and tighten the terminal screws firmly (torque 3 to 5 Nm). With small conductor cross-sections (e.g. 4 mm2) the connecting line must be placed in the indentation (stamping) of the current loops, so that it cannot shift sideways when tightening the terminal screws. Ensure that the connecting line remains in the indentation when tightening.
Indentation (stamping) for smaller connection lines

Current loop conductor

Fig 7.4

Cross-section through current loop conductor

It is recommended to identify the beginning and end of the relevant conductors with a suitable test unit (e.g. buzzer) to ensure that the right consumer is connected to the meter output.

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

Landis+Gyr 7-9

Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board

Pulse inputs

Communication interfaces Communication unit

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs

L1

L2

L3

Phase connections

Fig 7.5

Meter connections (example ZMD300xT)


Inputs and/or output contacts of extension board Communication interface Interface board

U1

U2 U3

Control inputs and output contacts Voltage outputs

L1

L2

L3

Phase connections

Fig 7.6

Meter connections (example ZMD300xR)

Power losses at the terminals

Note

Insufficiently tightened screws at the phase connections can lead to increased power losses at the terminals and therefore to undesirable heating. A contact resistance of 1 m causes a power loss of 10 W at 100 A !

Connecting the signal inputs and outputs 4. Shorten the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs to the required length and strip them for approx. 4 mm (wires and strands up to 2.5 mm2 can be connected). If stranded wire is used, it is recommended to provide it with ferrules for connection.

5.

Landis+Gyr 7-10

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

6.

Connect the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs as follows to the screwless spring-loaded terminals (the terminals are numbered as shown on the connection diagram): - Insert a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig 7.7 A). - Now place the stripped connecting wire in the lower opening and hold it there securely (Fig 7.7 B). - Withdraw the screwdriver. The connecting wire is then firmly fixed (Fig 7.7 C).

. ca

m 4m

A
Fig 7.7

B
Connection in screwless spring-loaded terminals

Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The insulation of the connecting line must extend as far as the terminal indentation, i.e. there must be no further bare part of the connecting line visible above the terminal edge (as shown in Fig 7.7 C). Touching live parts is dangerous to life. The stripped part of the connecting wire should be shortened if necessary. If a connecting wire must be disconnected again for any reason, this is performed in the reverse sequence:

A
Fig 7.8

B
Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal

Damage to terminals

Warning

Never withdraw connecting wires with the terminal closed, since this could damage the terminal.

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

Landis+Gyr 7-11

7.6

Check of connections
Effects of connection errors

Note

Only a properly connected meter measures correctly ! Every connection error results in a financial loss for the power company ! Before putting into operation the following points must be checked again and corrected if necessary: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Has the correct meter (identification number) been installed at the measuring point of the relevant consumer ? Is the calibration connection closed (voltage jumper between phase and voltage circuit) (no contact pin inserted to lift the contact spring) ? Are the phase connections centered in the current terminals ? Are all thrust screws for the phase connections and neutral tightened sufficiently ? Are all conductors of phase 1 connected correctly according to the connection diagram ? - Output of consumer fuse terminal 1 of meter - Terminal 3 of meter Consumer load 6. 7. Are all conductors of phases 2 and 3 connected correctly according to the connection diagram (follow conductors similar to phase 1) ? Are all conductors of the neutral connected correctly according to the connection diagram ? - Neutral isolator of consumer terminal 10 of meter - Terminal 12 of meter Consumer load

Landis+Gyr 7-12

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

7.7

Commissioning and functional check


Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The consumer fuses must be re-inserted before commissioning and functional check of the meter. If the terminal cover is not screwed tight, there is a danger of contact with the connection terminals. Contact with live components is dangerous to life. The relevant consumer fuses should therefore be removed before making any modifications to the installation and these kept in a safe place until completing the work to prevent anyone re-inserting them unnoticed. Prerequisites for commissioning and functional check

Note

If no mains voltage is present, commissioning and functional check must be performed at a later date. The installed meter should be put into service and checked as follows: 1. 2. 3. Insert the preliminary fuses removed for installation. The meter is switched on. Check whether the operating display appears correctly (no error message). Check on the display whether all three phases L1, L2 and L3 are indicated and show the right phase sequence. - If one phase is not present, the relevant symbol is absent. This is also the case if the voltage is less than 20 V. - With the normal phase sequence L1-L2-L3 the symbols are displayed continuously. - If, however, the meter is connected with reversed phase sequence (e.g. L2-L1-L3) the symbols flash. The direction of field rotation (clockwise or anticlockwise) is determined by the parametrization. This has no influence, however, on the measuring behaviour of the meter.

Fig 7.9

Phase sequence indication

4. 5.

Remove all consumer fuses. Insert the consumer fuse of phase 1 and check the display of the energy direction: +P to right. If the energy direction arrow P points to the left, the input and output of phase 1 are interchanged. If the meter displays no energy direction, the voltage jumper is open, the consumer fuse defective or the neutral is not connected. Remove the consumer fuse of phase 1 again.
Landis+Gyr 7-13

6.

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

7. 8. 9.

Repeat the same test for the other phases as in points 5 and 6. Further values (e.g. phase voltages) can be checked in the service list obtained via the service menu if parametrized. Check the tariff displays and switch the control voltages to the tariff inputs on and off. The arrow symbols of the tariff display must change.

10. If the meter is connected to a meter readout system via the electrical interface, a check should be made of correct functioning of the data transmission. 11. If a GSM modem is connected to the meter, the SMS transmission function should be checked by sending a test SMS message, e.g. to your own mobile telephone (refer also to section 4.16.3 "Sending an SMS message"). 12. Screw on the terminal cover if the meter is operating correctly. Otherwise first locate and eliminate the error. 13. Seal the terminal cover with two company seals. 14. Set the current date and time with the relevant formatted command (see 11.3) or in the set mode (see 11.4). 15. Close the front door. 16. Re-seal the front door.

Landis+Gyr 7-14

H 71 0200 0061 f en - ZMD300 - User Manual Installation and commissioning

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

Maintenance and service

H 71 0200 0041 e en

Revision history
Index a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 28.09.2000 18.04.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision. Section 8.4 new. Various corrections ZMD310CT/400AT included ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 8-2

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Revision history

Table of contents
8 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.3 8.4 8.5 Maintenance and service ______________________________8-5 Meter check ________________________________________________ 8-5 Meter testing _______________________________________________ 8-5 Test mode _________________________________________________ 8-5 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Optical test output ___________________________________________ 8-7 Creep test _________________________________________________ 8-7 Starting test active part _______________________________________ 8-8 Starting test reactive part _____________________________________ 8-8 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Changing values in set mode _________________________________ 8-10 Changing the battery ________________________________________ 8-11

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-3

Landis+Gyr 8-4

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Table of contents

Maintenance and service


This chapter describes the necessary maintenance and servicing work. This includes checking and testing of the meter, using formatted commands, etc.

8.1

Meter check
The following points should be checked on the meters periodically (e.g. with every data readout): Is the meter dry and clean (particularly display and optical interface) ? Is the meter in operation and serviceable (operating display present and sensible) ? Are all calibration and factory seals undamaged ? Has the meter internal self-test performed regularly recorded any error since the previous check (check on the display or readout log). Have the values of the energy registers changed within reasonable limits since the last data readout (no unauthorised manipulations made to the installation) ? Does the symbol appear in the liquid crystal display ? Continue as described in chapter 9 "Eror messages and measures in event of faults" if errors or irregularities are found.

8.2

Meter testing
Meter tests should be performed at periodic intervals according to the valid national regulations (either on all meters or on specific random samples). In principle the meters should be dismantled for this purpose according to the instructions in section 9.3 "Disconnecting meter" and replaced by a substitute meter. The meter test can also be performed on the spot in certain circumstances.

8.2.1

Test mode
The test mode permits increasing the resolution of the energy registers by 1 to 3 digits. This allows the power supply company to carry out the so called measuring unit test in sufficiently short time. In test mode the same registers shown as rolling display in the operating display are always displayed, but with high resolution and not rolling. The energy registers comprise a total of 12 digits. A maximum of 8 digits, however, is shown on the display. The effective number of digits shown and the number of decimal places are determined by the parametrizing. For the test mode more decimal places are normally parametrized (maximum 4) to permit a quicker test of the transmission to the energy registers.

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-5

Display in normal mode Register

Display in test mode

Fig. 8.1

Display changeover normal mode test mode

Changeover from normal to test mode and back is made by formatted commands (see chapter 8.3 "Input of formatted commands") or manually in the service menu. In test mode the optical test output for active energy can also provide reactive energy pulses depending on the parametrizing. Reactive energy pulses are supplied to this test output if the register shown on the display represents a reactive energy register. Active energy pulses are supplied for all other measured values shown as in normal operating mode.

8.2.2

Measuring times
For technical reasons greater measuring deviations can occur during shortterm measurements. It is therefore recommended to use sufficiently long measuring times in order to achieve the required accuracy. Table of measuring times required:

ZMD400xx ZFD400xx
Un = 58 to 230 V In= 1 A, 5 A Current [% In] 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200

Measuring uncertainty 0.1 % 3P cos=1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 1P 1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 3P 0.5 90 s 40 s 15 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s

Measuring uncertainty 0.05 % 3P cos=1 80 s 40 s 16 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 1P 1 80 s 40 s 16 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 12 s 3P 0.5 160 s 80 s 32 s 18 s 14 s 12 s 12 s 12 s

3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase

Landis+Gyr 8-6

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service

ZMD300xx
Un = 230 V Ib = 5 A Current [% Ib] 5 10 20 50 100 1000 2000 2400

Measuring uncertainty 0.1 % 3P cos=1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 1P 1 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s 6s 3P 0,5 90 s 40 s 20 s 10 s 8s 6s 6s 6s

3 P = universal 1 P = single-phase

8.2.3

Optical test output


The red optical test outputs on the meter above the LCD should be used for meter testing. These supply pulses at a frequency dependent on the meter constant R, whereby the rising edge is always decisive for the test. Note that the digital signal processing provides a delay of 2 seconds between the instantaneous power at the meter and the appearance of the pulses at the optical test outputs. No pulses are lost. The number of pulses per second for the desired power is obtained by multiplying the meter constant R by the power in kW divided by 3600. Example: Meter constant R = 1000 Power P = 35 kW f-test output = R x P / 3600 = 1000 x 35 / 3600 = 10 imp/s

The optical test outputs are continuously lit at creep.

8.2.4

Creep test
A test voltage Up of 1.15 Un is used for the creep test (no-load test) to IEC 61036 (e.g. Up = 265 V with Un = 230 V). Procedure: 1. 2. Disconnect the meter from the mains for at least 10 seconds. Then switch on the test voltage Up and wait approx. 10 seconds. After this time the energy direction arrows must disappear. The red optical test outputs are permanently "lit". Switch on test mode (high resolution). The meter must not deliver more than one pulse during the creep test. Check the energy levels for changes in test mode. They must not increase by more than the value of one pulse (see face plate).

3. 4.

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-7

8.2.5
ZxD400xx

Starting test active part


Procedure: 1. Apply a load current of 0.02 % of the nominal current In (e.g. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cos = 1. The meter must remain in creep. Increase the load current to 0.1 % In for the ZxD405xx or 0.2 % In for the ZxD410xx (i.e. 10 mA with In = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".

2.

ZMD300xx

Procedure: 1. Apply a load current of 0.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.g. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and cos = 1. The meter must remain in creep. Increase the load current to 0.4 % Ib (i.e. 20 mA with Ib = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "P" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".

2.

8.2.6

Starting test reactive part


Procedure: 1. Apply a load current of 0.02 % of the nominal current In (e.g. 1 mA with In = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sin = 1. The meter must remain in creep. Increase the load current to 0.2 % In (i.e. 10 mA with In = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for reactive energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".

ZxD400Cx

2.

ZMD300Cx

Procedure: 1. Apply a load current of 0.1 % of the basic current Ib (e.g. 5 mA with Ib = 5 A) and the voltage Un (three-phase in each case) and sin = 1. The meter must remain in creep. Increase the load current to 0.4 % Ib (i.e. 20 mA with Ib = 5 A). The energy direction arrow "Q" must appear within 10 seconds. The optical test output for active energy consumption is no longer permanently "lit".

2.

Landis+Gyr 8-8

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service

8.3

Input of formatted commands


The following operating data or meter characteristics can be modified by the input of formatted commands. The user of formatted commands, however, must have the necessary access authorization according to the security system. The following commands can be used both according to IEC 62056-21 and also with DLMS: Set time / date Set identification numbers for the power supply company and for the manufacturer (by line). Initiation of reset via interface Neutralize reset inputs KA/KB Set / reset reset counter Set / reset energy registers Set / reset total energy registers Set / reset demand maximum registers Set / reset power factor registers Reset stored values Reset battery hours counter Reset voltage failures registers Switch on / off increased resolution (test mode) of energy registers Delete error messages Change passwords P1,P2 and W5 Reset load profile Reset event profile The following commands can only be executed with DLMS: Reset event register - Under- and overvoltages - Demand messages - Current messages - Power factor messages Set thresholds for messages Formatted commands are transferred to the meter with a suitable aid (hand held terminal or laptop) via the optical interface or via an interface circuit of the communication unit.

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-9

Procedure: 1. 2. 3. Start the hand held terminal or laptop (according to the details in the associated operating instructions). Connect the cable of the reading head to the handheld terminal or laptop. Place the reading head in the "Readout" indentation on the plastic viewing window of the meter. The reading head cable must point towards the terminal cover (when mounted vertically down). The reading head is held magnetically. Input the required formatted commands to the meter (according to the details in the operating instructions for the communication software used with the hand held terminal or laptop). Check that the desired effect takes place, e.g. that the modified identification number has been correctly stored in the meter (display or readout log) or if the test mode has been switched on (arrow symbol on display). Remove the reading head from the meter again after transmission.

4.

5.

6.

8.4

Changing values in set mode


In set mode some values (date and time, identification numbers and battery hours counter) can be changed with the aid of the reset button and display buttons, without the use of auxiliary aids such as hand-held terminal or laptop. Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the front door seal. Open the front door, so that the reset button is accessible. Press the "up" or "down" display button briefly. The display changes from operating display to display check. Press the reset button. The display changes to the service menu with the first menu item. Press the "down" display button as many times briefly, until the menu item "Set mode" (SEt) is displayed. Press the "up" or "down" display button for longer (at least 2 seconds), until the first value for setting is displayed. Select the value to be changed with the "up" or "down" display button. Press the reset button. The first digit of the value to be changed flashes. Change the digit by pressing the "up" (increase) or "down" (decrease) display button as required.

10. Press the reset button. The next digit of the value to be changed flashes, if it was not previously the last digit. Otherwise all digits flash together.

Landis+Gyr 8-10

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service

11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all digits of the value to be changed, until all digits of the changed value flash together. 12. Press the reset button to confirm the new value (the value set can be rejected and the previous value retained by pressing the "up" or "down" display button). After pressing the reset button the new value is given a plausibility test and stored if the test result is positive. The next value for setting is displayed. In the event of an error (e.g. invalid date or time) all digits continue flashing and the input must be repeated. 13. If required, further values can be changed as described in steps 7 to 12. 14. If you press the "up" and "down" display buttons simultaneously, the operating display appears again. 15. Close the front door. 16. Re-seal the front door.

8.5

Changing the battery


If the meter is provided with a battery, this must be changed if one of the following events occurs: The symbol appears in the liquid crystal display. The battery has been in the meter for more than 10 years (preventive servicing). It is recommended to note the date of insertion on the battery. The 10 years depend on the product and on the age of the battery when inserting it into the meter. The battery operating hours counter indicates over 80,000 hours (can be read under code C.6.0 in service mode). The battery charge indicates less than 4.8 V (can be read under code C.6.1 in service mode). Meters with or without battery

Note

Only meters parametrized as "fitted with battery" have the symbol and the battery operating hours counter. Dangerous voltage on contacts in the battery compartment

Danger

The contacts in the battery compartment may have mains voltage applied (F circuit). Therefore only remove the battery with the existing battery holder and insert the new battery only with the battery holder. Ensure that the contacts are never touched. Replacement battery

Note

Only use a lithium battery with a rated voltage of 6 V and the same construction as the original battery as a replacement.

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-11

Procedure: 1. 2. Remove the front door seal. Open the front door. The battery compartment is on the left below the liquid crystal display.

Fig. 8.2

Battery compartment

3.

Press on the latch of the plastic battery holder until it releases and then withdraw the battery holder with the old battery.

Fig. 8.3

Removing the battery

4. 5.
Landis+Gyr 8-12

Mark the current date on the new battery. Draw the old battery from the holder and insert the new battery.
H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service

Fig. 8.4

Battery holder and battery

6. 7. 8. 9.

Push the battery holder with battery in the battery compartment until the latch engages. Reset the battery hours counter to zero with the relevant formatted command (see 8.3) or in the set mode (see 8.4). Close the front door. Re-seal the front door.

10. Dispose of old battery as hazardous waste in accordance with local regulations. Checking time-of-day and date

Note

After inserting the battery, check the time-of-day and date without power applied and set these values again if necessary.

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Maintenance and service Preliminary edition

Landis+Gyr 8-13

Landis+Gyr 8-14

H 71 0200 0041 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Preliminary edition Maintenance and service

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

Error messages and measures in event of faults

H 71 0200 0042 e en

Revision history
Index a a b c d e Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 06.04.2000 29.09.2000 28.02.2002 02.05.2002 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Text and illustration adaptations after internal revision Index field display changed Changes on pages 5, 8, 10 and 12 New error message: check-sum stored values / event log ZMD310AT included New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 9-2

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
9 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4 Error messages and measures in event of faults ___________ 9-5 Error messages _____________________________________________ 9-5 Structure of an error message__________________________________ 9-5 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Operating faults ____________________________________________ 9-10 Disconnecting meters________________________________________ 9-11 Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx) _________ 9-11 Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx) _______________ 9-13 Repairing meters ___________________________________________ 9-14

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 9-3

Landis+Gyr 9-4

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Error messages and measures in event of faults


This chapter explains the significance of error messages and indicates action to be taken in the event of their appearance and for functional disturbances. The removal of the meter and its repair are also described.

9.1

Error messages
The meters regularly perform an internal self-test. This checks the correct function of all important parts. In the event of a serious error detected, the meters display an error code. This error code appears as an eight-digit figure together with "F.F" or "FF" in the display, depending on the parametrization and significance of the error. The error code is always included in the readout log (error code F.F(00000000) = no error). If nothing else is specified in the following description of the error groups, the error messages can only be deleted with formatted commands (see 8.3 "Input of formatted commands"). If the error occurs again, the meter should be removed and sent to the responsible service and repair center (according to 9.4 "Repairing meters").

9.1.1

Structure of an error message


An error message has the following form:

Fig. 9.1

Error message from meters of the ZxD series

Meters of the ZxD series all use the same format for error messages. This consists of four groups of 2 digits each, whereby the groups have the following significance:
Structure

F.F

00 00 00 00
Error for write/read access

Time-base error (clock)

Check-sum error

Other errors

Error messages of ZxD meters

Fig. 9.2

Significance of error message


Landis+Gyr 9-5

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Each group has two digits written in hexadecimal notation and can therefore have the values 0 to 9 and letters A to F. Both digits each form the sum of the individual values of 4 possible types of error as shown in the following diagrams.

9.1.2

Error groups
Group 1 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Insufficient battery voltage Invalid time / invalid date * * * * * *
* not used

Time-base errors (clock)

Fig 9.3

Group 1 of error message

The first digit in the first group has no significance, since no error messages are assigned to it. The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and 3 (both error messages set). Significance: F.F 01 00 00 00 Insufficient battery voltage Battery missing or discharged. The calendar clock will stop when the Supercap is discharged following separation from the mains. The error is deleted automatically when the battery voltage has again reached a sufficient value (e.g. after inserting a new battery as described in 8.5 "Changing the battery"). This error message only appears if the meter is parametrized as "fitted with battery". Otherwise there is no check of the battery condition. F.F 02 00 00 00 Invalid time / invalid date The meter has found that the calendar clock has stopped at some time. The clock is running, but shows the wrong time or date. The error is deleted automatically when the time and date have been set correctly by the relevant formatted command or manually in the set mode (see 8.3 "Input of formatted commands" or 8.4 "Changing values in set mode").

Landis+Gyr 9-6

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Errors for write/read access

Group 2 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Main memory RAM Backup/parameter memory Measuring system Time base Load profile memory Ripple control receiver (extension board) Communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT) Display card

Fig. 9.4

Group 2 of error message

In the second group both digits can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance: F.F 00 x1 00 00 Error in RAM main memory This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when starting the meter if the RAM test fails. The meter does not operate and must be changed. The same applies to messages: F.F .. x3 / x5 / x7 / x9 / xB / xD / xF F.F 00 x2 00 00 Error in backup/parameter memory The meter supplies this message in the event of a repeated memory test failure. The meter can contain faulty data or fail. F.F 00 x4 00 00 Error in the measuring system The meter supplies this message for repeated failure of the measuring system test. The meter can contain faulty data or fail. F.F 00 x8 00 00 Error in time base The meter sets this message for repeated failure of the time base test. The calendar clock can display an invalid time or date. F.F 00 1x 00 00 Error in load profile memory (EEPROM) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a memory test. The meter can contain incorrect data. F.F 00 2x 00 00 Error in the ripple control receiver (extension board) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the ripple control receiver on the extension board. The meter uses the default configuration. F.F 00 4x 00 00 Error in the communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only) The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a test of the communication unit. Communication fails. F.F 00 8x 00 00 Error in the display card The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a display card test. The liquid crystal display shows incorrect data.

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Landis+Gyr 9-7

Check-sum errors

Group 3 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code ROM check-sum Backup data memory check-sum Parameter memory check-sum Load profile check-sum Check-sum stored values / event log * * * not used *

Fig. 9.5

Group 3 of error message

The first digit in the third group can have the value 0 (no error message) or 1 (error message set). The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance: F.F 00 00 01 00 Check-sum error in ROM of microprocessor This appears in the display as a so-called Fatal Error when the relevant ROM test fails. F.F 00 00 02 00 Check-sum error in memory for backup data This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant memory test fails. F.F 00 00 04 00 Check-sum error in memory for parameters This also appears on the display as so-called Fatal Error if the relevant EEPROM test fails. In all 3 cases mentioned the meter does not operate and should be changed. The same applies to messages F.F .. .. 03 / 05 / 06 / 07 / 09 / 0A up to 0F. F.F 00 00 08 00 Check-sum error in memory of load profile The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a load profile test. The meter can contain incorrect data. F.F 00 00 1x 00 Check-sum test for the stored values or event log The meter sets this message for repeated failure of a check-sum test for the stored values or event log. The meter can contain incorrect data.

Landis+Gyr 9-8

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Other errors

Gruppe 4 of error message of ZxD meters Sum of values 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code Startup failed Overflow in measuring system * Setting mode not concluded System error (e.g. watch dog) * * not used * Extension board identification not valid

Fig. 9.6

Group 4 of error message

The first digit in the fourth group can have the values 0 to 3 and 8 to B. The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all four error messages set). Significance: F.F 00 00 00 x1 Invalid startup owing to incorrect data storage The meter has detected that the last data storage was not performed correctly. The meter can contain incorrect data. F.F 00 00 00 x2 Overflow or no activity of measuring system The meter has detected an error in the data processing. It may not have measured part of the energy. F.F 00 00 00 x8 Setting mode not concluded A setting command has not been concluded correctly. The meter can contain incorrect data. The error is deleted automatically when the next similar setting command is correctly concluded. F.F 00 00 00 1x System error in microprocessor The meter loses all data determined since the last storage, i.e. for 24 hours maximum. F.F 00 00 00 8x Identification of extension board differs from that parametrized in the meter. The meter possibly does not have functions required such as data profile, control inputs or output signals.

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Landis+Gyr 9-9

9.2

Operating faults
If the liquid crystal display is illegible or the data readout does not function, the following points should first be checked: 1. 2. 3. Is the mains voltage present (pre-fuses intact and test terminals closed)?. Is the maximum permissible ambient temperature not exceeded ? Is the plastic viewing window over the face plate clean (not scratched, painted over, misted over or soiled in any way) ?

Danger of short-circuits

Warning

Never clean soiled meters under running water or with high pressure devices. Penetrating water can cause short-circuits. A damp cleaning cloth is sufficient to remove normal dirt such as dust. If the meter is more heavily soiled, it should be dismantled if necessary and sent to the responsible service and repair centre, so that a new plastic viewing window can be fitted. If none of the points listed is the cause of the fault, the meter should be disconnected, removed and sent to the responsible service and repair centre (according to section 9.4 "Repairing meters").

Landis+Gyr 9-10

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

9.3
9.3.1

Disconnecting meters
Removing meters with transformer connection (ZxD400xx)
Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The connecting conductors must be free from voltage when the meter is removed. It is dangerous to life to touch live parts. Remove the corresponding pre-fuses and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the work. If the meter is connected via voltage transformers, it must be possible to open the test terminal (e.g. TVS14). For this purpose release the screw of the relevant jumper with an insulated screwdriver, push the jumper away from the terminal and then re-tighten the screw. If there is no test terminal block, the primary voltage must be interrupted, i.e. the system switched off. Dangerous voltage on current transformers

Danger

The secondary sides of the current transformer circuits must not be opened if a current is flowing in the primary. This would produce an extremely high voltage of several thousand volts dangerous to life at the terminals and the insulation would be destroyed. Short-circuit the current transformer at the test terminal block (e.g. TVS14) to remove the meter. For this purpose release the screw of the relevant short-circuit jumper with an insulated screwdriver, push the shortcircuit jumper over the terminals on the current transformer side and then re-tighten the screw. The circuit on the meter side can then be opened without danger. If there is no test terminal block, the primary voltage must be interrupted, i.e. the system switched off. The meter should be removed as follows: 1. Short-circuit the current transformer with the short-circuit jumpers in the test terminal block using an insulated screwdriver and interrupt the voltage connections with the jumpers in the test terminal block. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover. Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument. If not, check the condition of the test terminals again according to Fig 9.7. Remove the relevant pre-fuses if necessary and ensure that they cannot be re-inserted by anyone unnoticed before completing the installation.

2. 3. 4.

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Landis+Gyr 9-11

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9 11

Short-circuit jumpers closed

k
L1 L2 L3 N

l L

k K

l k L K L l

Voltage jumpers open Pre-fuses and neutral conductor isolator removed Loads

Fig 9.7

Condition of test terminal block before removing meter

5.

Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows: - Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig. 9.8A). - Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig. 9.8B). - Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig. 9.8C).

A
Fig. 9.8

Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals

Damage to terminals

Warning

Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals. The terminals could be damaged. 6. Release the terminal screws 1 to 11 of the phase connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals. Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters.

7.

Landis+Gyr 9-12

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

9.3.2

Removing meter with direct connection (ZMD300xx)


Dangerous voltage on conductors

Danger

The connecting wires at the place of installation must not be live when removing the meter. Touching of live parts is dangerous to life. Remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed. The meter should be removed as follows: 1. 2. 3. Remove the two factory seals at the screws of the terminal cover. Release the two screws of the terminal cover and remove it. Check that the connecting wires are not live using a phase tester or universal measuring instrument. If they are live, remove the corresponding customer fuses and keep these in a safe place until work is completed, so that they cannot be replaced by anyone unnoticed. Remove the connecting wires of the signal inputs and outputs from the screwless spring-loaded terminals as follows: - Place a size 1 screwdriver in the upper opening and insert it turning slightly upwards (Fig. 9.9A). - Then draw the wire from the lower opening (Fig. 9.9B). - Withdraw the screwdriver (Fig. 9.9C).

4.

A
Fig. 9.9

Removing connections in screwless spring-loaded terminals

Damage to terminals

Warning

Never withdraw connecting wires from closed terminals. The terminals could be damaged. 5. Release the terminal screws 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 12 of the phase connecting wires with a suitable screwdriver and withdraw the phase connecting wires from the terminals. Fit a substitute meter as described in section 7.5 "Connecting meter" and the following chapters.

6.

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Landis+Gyr 9-13

9.4

Repairing meters
Meters must only be repaired by the responsible service and repair centre (or manufacturer). The following procedure should be adopted if a meter repair is necessary: 1. 2. 3. If installed, remove the meter as described in section 9.3 and fit a substitute meter. Describe the error found as exactly as possible and state the name and telephone number of the person responsible in case of inquiries. Pack the meter to ensure it can suffer no further damage during transport. Preferably use the original packing if available. Do not enclose any loose components. Send the meter to the responsible service and repair centre.

4.

Landis+Gyr 9-14

H 71 0200 0042 e en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Error messages and measures in event of faults

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 USER MANUAL

10

Decommissioning, disposal

H 71 0200 0043a en

Revision history
Index a Date 26.07.1999 17.04.2000 31.03.2003 Comments First edition Front page and revision history added New layout according to CI and general adaptation for series 2

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 10-2

H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Revision history

Table of contents
10 10.1 10.2 Decommissioning, disposal __________________________ 10-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5

H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

Landis+Gyr 10-3

Landis+Gyr 10-4

H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Table of contents

10

Decommissioning, disposal
This chapter explains the disconnection of the meter from the system and its correct disposal.

10.1

Decommissioning
The procedure for disconnecting and removing the meter from the mains is described in Chapter 9.3.

10.2

Disposal
Based on the data specified in environmental certificate ISO 14001, the components used in meters are largely separable and can therefore be taken to the relevant disposal or recycling point. Disposal and environmental protection regulations

Note

For the disposal of meters observe the local disposal and environmental protection regulations in effect without fail.
Components Printed circuit boards Battery LEDs, LCD-Display Metal parts Plastic components Disposal Electronic waste: disposal according to local regulations. Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations. Hazardous waste: disposal according to local regulations. Sorted and taken to collective materials disposal point. Sorted and taken to recycling (regranulation) plant or if no other possibility to refuse incineration.

H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Decommissioning, disposal

Landis+Gyr 10-5

Landis+Gyr 10-6

H 71 0200 0043a en - ZMD300 / ZMD400 / ZFD400 - User Manual Decommissioning, disposal

Electricity Meters IEC

INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL


Landis+Gyr Dialog

ZMD300 AT / CT USER MANUAL

11

Index

H 71 0200 0141 c en

Revision history
Index a b c Date 28.02.2002 19.04.2002 31.03.2003 30.06.2003 Comments First edition Update according to document changes New layout according to CI and update according to document changes Update according to document changes for software version B21

Landis+Gyr Ltd. Feldstrasse 1 CH - 6301 Zug Switzerland Phone: +41 41 724 41 41 www.landisgyr.com

Landis+Gyr 11-2

H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Revision history

11

Index
This chapter contains an overall index of the user manual ZMD300xT. Absolute accuracy __________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy class _____________________________________________ 2-12 Accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________________ 2-13 Activation of control signals__________________________________ 4.7-8 Active component of power__________________________________ 4.2-8 Active power ___________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8, 4.2-9 Active power direction arrow___________________________________ 5-7 Adaptation of energy portions ________________________________ 4.9-7 Additional control inputs ______________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Additional meter functions_____________________________________ 2-6 Additional output contacts_____________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Advance ___________________________________________ 4.8-9, 4.8-10 Allocation of the data and parameter groups ___________________ 4.15-9 Analogue-digital converter___________________________________ 4.2-8 Aperiodic memory ________________________________________ 4.13-5 Apparent power __________________________________________ 4.2-10 Application possibilities for event signals ______________________ 4.14-7 Aron circuit____________________________________________4.2-6, 7-6 Arrow symbols ______________________________________________ 5-8 Arrows for status indication___________________________________ 3-10 Asynchronous integrating period_____________________________ 4.9-16 AT instructions for controlling GSM modems __________________ 4.16-10 Audio frequency filter ______________________________________ 4.6-7 Automatic data readout _______________________________________ 6-9 Background lighting of LCD display______________________________ 5-7 Basic current ______________________________________________ 2-11 Basic information for connecting meter __________________________ 7-6 Basic layout of LCD display ____________________________________ 5-7 Basic versions of energy recording _______________________ 4.8-5, 4.9-5 Battery __________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Battery charge condition ______________________________________ 5-8 Battery charge status________________________________________ 8-11 Battery compartment____________________________________ 3-6, 8-12 Battery disposal ____________________________________________ 8-13 Battery exchange ___________________________________________ 8-11 Battery holder _____________________________________________ 8-12 Battery operating hours counter _______________________________ 8-11 Battery operating time_____________________________________ 4.11-5 Baud rate optical interface ___________________________________ 2-14 Behaviour of ripple control receiver with mains failure____________ 4.6-11 Billing data _________________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Billing period ______________________________________ 4.8-10, 4.9-13 Block schematic diagram _______________________________ 4.1-7, 4.1-5 Block schematic diagram of measuring unit _____________________ 4.2-5 Block schematic diagram of ripple control receiver _______________ 4.6-6 Buttons_____________________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Calculation of apparent power_______________________________ 4.2-10 Calculation of energy consumption ____________________________ 4.8-9 Calendar clock ________________________________________2-13, 4.4-5 Calendar days ____________________________________________ 4.4-5

H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

Landis+Gyr 11-3

Calibration________________________________________________ 4.2-8 Calibration seal __________________________________________ 2-6, 3-5 Calibration stage___________________________________________ 4.2-8 Case of meter ___________________________________________ 2-6, 3-5 Changeover date __________________________________________ 4.5-7 Changeover to a new switching program _______________________ 4.5-7 Changing the battery ________________________________________8-11 Changing the date and time__________________________________ 4.4-6 Changing values in set mode __________________________________8-10 Characteristics of meters ______________________________________2-9 Check of connections ________________________________________7-12 Check sum errors ____________________________________________9-8 Checking meter______________________________________________8-5 Clock frequency ___________________________________________ 4.2-8 Clock time ________________________________________________ 4.8-7 Combimeter ________________________________________________2-6 Commissioning _________________________________________ 7-5, 7-13 Communication interface _________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-5 Communication unit _____________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 8-9 Company seal _______________________________________ 2-6, 3-5, 7-5 Compensation of natural errors _______________________________ 4.2-8 Condition of test terminal block before removing meter _____________9-12 Conditions for installation and commissioning______________________7-5 Conditions for the use of this user manual _______________________0-10 Connecting conductor_________________________________________7-7 Connecting meter ____________________________________________7-9 Connecting phase connection lines ______________________________7-9 Connecting signal inputs and outputs ___________________________7-10 Connection diagram control inputs /output contacts________________2-19 Connection diagram extension board ___________________________2-20 Connection diagram extension board with ripple control receiver ___ 4.6-11 Connection diagram three-wire networks ________________________2-19 Connection in spring-loaded terminals___________________________7-11 Connections ___________________________________________ 2-17, 3-8 Construction of meters ________________________________________3-5 Control elements ____________________________________________5-5 Control inputs ___________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Control of display via optical interface ____________________________5-5 Control signal statuses ______________________________________ 4.7-7 Control table ______________________________________________ 4.7-6 Control voltage _____________________________________________2-13 Controlling registers ________________________________________ 4.7-8 Controlling the integrating period ____________________________ 4.9-14 Creep test __________________________________________________8-7 CS interface ___________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-8 Cumulated demand maximum _______________________________ 4.9-13 Cumulated status __________________________________________ 4.8-9 Current monitoring ________________________________________ 4.14-8 Current values _____________________________________________2-11 Data preparation for billing ____________________________4.1-11, 4.1-9 Data readout via optical interface _______________________________6-9 Date change ______________________________________________ 4.4-6 Day tables________________________________________________ 4.5-5 Decommissioning ___________________________________________10-5 Deleting load profile ______________________________________ 4.13-12 Demand inhibition ________________________________________ 4.9-18
Landis+Gyr 11-4 H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

Demand monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-8 Demand recording _________________________________________ 4.9-5 Demand registers_________________________________________ 4.9-13 Demand values for tariff control _____________________________ 4.9-13 Determination of telephone number and SMS message__________ 4.16-11 Determination of the valid day table ___________________________ 4.5-6 Device Language Message Specification (DLMS) __________________ 6-12 Digit size of LCD display _____________________________________ 2-13 Digital instantaneous values _________________________________ 4.2-8 Dimensions of meter ________________________________________ 2-16 Direct connection ____________________________________________ 2-6 Direction arrows_____________________________________________ 5-7 Direction of rotating field___________________________________ 4.2-12 Disconnecting meter ________________________________________ 9-11 Display ____ 2-13, 3-10, 4.4-10, 4.6-12, 4.8-11, 4.9-19, 4.10-9, 4.12-6, 5-7 Display buttons _________________________________________ 3-5, 5-5 Display check ______________________________________________ 5-11 Display examples calendar clock _____________________________ 4.4-10 Display examples demand recording__________________________ 4.9-20 Display examples display list __________________________________ 5-12 Display examples energy recording___________________________ 4.8-11 Display examples operating time registers _____________________ 4.11-5 Display examples power factor ______________________________ 4.10-9 Display examples resetting _________________________________ 4.12-6 Display examples ripple control receiver_______________________ 4.6-12 Display list ____________________________________________ 5-5, 5-11 Display menu ______________________________________________ 5-12 Display of events _________________________________________ 4.13-6 Display of load profile _____________________________________ 4.13-9 Display range changeover _____________________________________ 8-6 Display window __________________________________________ 4.8-11 Disposal __________________________________________________ 10-5 Disposal regulations_________________________________________ 10-5 Disturbances _______________________________________________ 9-5 Division of memory area available __________________________ 4.13-13 DLMS (Device Language Message Specification) __________________ 6-12 DLMS items _______________________________________________ 6-12 DLMS specification __________________________________________ 6-12 Dummy communication unit ___________________________________ 3-6 Effect of hysteresis _______________________________________ 4.14-6 Electromagnetic compatibility _________________________________ 2-15 EN 61037 ________________________________________________ 4.6-5 Energy advance during the billing period _______________________ 4.8-9 Energy advance during the recording period ___________________ 4.8-10 Energy consumption recording _________________________________ 6-9 Energy proportions ___________________________________ 4.8-7, 4.9-7 Energy recording _____________________________________ 4.8-5, 4.8-9 Energy status _____________________________________________ 4.8-9 Environmental protection regulations ___________________________ 10-5 Error code _________________________________________________ 9-5 Error for write/read access ____________________________________ 9-7 Error groups ________________________________________________ 9-6 Error in backup/parameter memory _____________________________ 9-7 Error in communication unit (ZxDxxxAT/CT only) __________________ 9-7 Error in display card__________________________________________ 9-7 Error in load profile memory ___________________________________ 9-7
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-5

Error in main memory ________________________________________9-7 Error in measuring system _____________________________________9-7 Error in ripple control receiver __________________________________9-7 Error in time base ____________________________________________9-7 Error incorrect data storage ____________________________________9-9 Error indication _____________________________________________5-10 Error invalid startup __________________________________________9-9 Error message _________________________________________ 5-10, 9-5 Event display ____________________________________________ 4.13-6 Event log___________________________________________ 4.13-5, 5-15 Event readout ____________________________________________ 4.13-8 Event types ______________________________________________ 4.13-5 Exception days table________________________________________ 4.5-7 Extension board _____________________________________4.1-11, 4.1-9 Extension board identification error ______________________________9-9 External control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.9-18 External control of integrating period _________________________ 4.9-14 External dimensions of meter__________________________________2-16 External influences __________________________________________2-15 External pulse transmitter ____________________________4.1-12, 4.1-10 Face plate _________________________________________________3-10 Faults _____________________________________________________9-5 Field of application of meters ___________________________________2-6 Form of fixing _______________________________________________7-7 Formation of billing periods _________________________________ 4.12-5 Formation of control signals__________________________________ 4.7-6 Formation of energy proportions ______________________________ 4.8-7 Formation of mean value during resetting period ________________ 4.10-8 Formation of mean value of demand___________________________ 4.9-9 Formation of mean values ___________________________________ 4.2-8 Formation of measured quantities _____________________________ 4.2-9 Formation of power factor mean value during integrating period ___ 4.10-6 Formation of power factor minimum __________________________ 4.10-7 Formation of the maximum demand __________________________ 4.9-12 Formatted commands_________________________________________8-9 Four-quadrant measurement ________________________________ 4.2-10 Freeze function ___________________________________________ 4.9-11 Frequency range____________________________________________2-12 Frequency values ___________________________________________2-12 Front door__________________________________________________2-6 Function overview ____________________________________4.1-7, 4.1-5 Functional check ____________________________________________7-13 Functional principle of ripple control systems ____________________ 4.6-5 General view of meter ________________________________________2-5 Hand held terminal _______________________________________ 6-9, 8-9 Hazardous waste ___________________________________________10-5 Hysteresis _______________________________________________ 4.14-6 Identification of stored values _______________________________ 4.12-6 IEC 62056-21 ______________________________________ 6-6, 6-10, 8-9 Impulse inputs __________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-12, 4.1-7, 4.1-10 Impulse voltage strength _____________________________________2-16 Index field__________________________________________________5-8 Index system _______________________________________________5-9 Indication possibilities of LCD display ____________________________5-7 Inhibition of demand measurement___________________________ 4.9-18 Input circuit ______________________________________________ 4.2-7
Landis+Gyr 11-6 H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

Input mB _________________________________________ 4.9-14, 4.9-18 Input of formatted commands _________________________________ 8-9 Input signals _____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Inputs____________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7, 4.3-5 Installation _________________________________________________ 7-5 Instantaneous values_________________________________ 4.2-8, 4.10-5 Insufficient battery voltage ____________________________________ 9-6 Insulation strength__________________________________________ 2-15 Integrating period __________________________________ 4.9-11, 4.9-14 Interface board ____________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10 Interfaces____________________________________ 2-14, 4.1-12, 4.1-10 Internal control of demand inhibition _________________________ 4.9-19 Internal current transformer _________________________________ 4.2-7 Interval determination _____________________________________ 4.9-11 Interval period ___________________________________________ 4.9-11 Invalid time/date ____________________________________________ 9-6 Laptop ________________________________________________ 6-9, 8-9 LCD display ______________________________________ 2-13, 3-10, 5-7 Leap years _______________________________________________ 4.4-5 Liquid crystal display _______________________________ 2-13, 3-10, 5-7 Lithium battery_____________________________________________ 8-11 Load profile __________________________________ 4.9-11, 4.13-8, 5-14 Loading capacity ___________________________________________ 2-11 Log example_______________________________________________ 6-10 Lower part of meter case _____________________________________ 2-6 Main characteristics of meters__________________________________ 2-9 Main face plate ____________________________________________ 3-10 Mains frequency_____________________________________ 4.2-8, 4.2-11 Maintenance________________________________________________ 8-5 Manufacturer seal _______________________________________ 2-6, 3-5 Material for installation of meters _______________________________ 7-5 Maximum current___________________________________________ 2-11 Maximum demand ________________________________________ 4.9-12 M-Bus interface _____________________________________________ 6-8 Mean value formation ______________________________________ 4.2-8 Mean value of demand _____________________________________ 4.9-9 Mean value of power factor during the integrating period _________ 4.10-5 Mean value of power factor during the resetting period __________ 4.10-6 Measured quantities________________________________________ 4.2-6 Measured quantity indication__________________________________ 3-11 Measured values ____________________________________ 4.1-10, 4.1-8 Measures in event of faults ____________________________________ 9-5 Measuring accuracy _________________________________________ 2-12 Measuring deviations _________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring range ___________________________________________ 2-11 Measuring system ____________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Measuring times_____________________________________________ 8-6 Measuring uncertainty ____________________________________ 8-6, 8-7 Measuring unit ____________________________________________ 4.2-5 Memory ___________________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Memory area division_____________________________________ 4.13-13 Memory depth ___________________________________ 4.13-14, 4.13-15 Memory management ____________________________________ 4.13-13 Meter behaviour with time deviations __________________________ 4.4-8 Meter board ________________________________________________ 7-7 Meter case _____________________________________________ 2-6, 3-5
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-7

Meter check ________________________________________________8-5 Meter connection ____________________________________________7-9 Meter connections ___________________________________________3-8 Meter constant _________________________________________ 2-13, 8-7 Meter construction ___________________________________________3-5 Meter dimensions ___________________________________________2-17 Meter mounting _____________________________________________7-7 Meter testing __________________________________________ 5-16, 8-5 Minimum formation power factor_____________________________ 4.10-7 Modem ___________________________________________4.1-12, 4.1-10 Modifying operating data or meter characteristics __________________8-9 Monitored values _________________________________________ 4.14-5 Monitoring functions_______________________________________ 4.14-5 Monitoring of currents _____________________________________ 4.14-8 Monitoring of demand _____________________________________ 4.14-8 Monitoring of power factor__________________________________ 4.14-9 Monitoring of voltage ______________________________________ 4.14-7 Monitoring principle _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Monthly resetting _________________________________________ 4.12-6 Mounting the meter __________________________________________7-7 Movement accuracy of calendar clock ___________________________2-13 Neutral ____________________________________________________7-6 Neutral current ______________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-11 New start of integrating period ______________________________ 4.9-16 No activity of measuring system ________________________________9-9 No-load test ________________________________________________8-7 Normal mode _______________________________________________8-5 Numbering of quadrants ___________________________________ 4.2-10 OBIS index system ___________________________________________5-9 Object Identification System OBIS_______________________________5-9 Objective of DLMS __________________________________________6-12 Operating display ___________________________________________5-10 Operating faults ____________________________________________9-10 Operating hours counter _____________________________________8-11 Operating messages _______________________________________ 4.16-5 Operating messages recording_______________________________ 4.16-6 Operating time per tariff ___________________________________ 4.11-5 Operating time registers____________________________________ 4.11-5 Operation with only one or two phases __________________________2-11 Optical button _______________________________________________5-5 Optical interface ___________________________ 2-14, 3-5, 3-10, 6-6, 8-9 Optical test output __________________________________ 3-5, 5-16, 8-7 Output contacts _______________________________________ 2-13, 3-11 Output values ______________________________________________2-13 Outputs __________________________________ 2-13, 4.1-9, 4.1-7, 4.3-5 Overflow of measuring system__________________________________9-9 Overview meter function _______________________________4.1-7, 4.1-5 Ownership designation _______________________________________3-11 Parameter overwriting protection ____________________________ 4.15-5 Parametrization tool RPT01 for ripple control receivers ____________ 4.6-9 Parametrizing of the ripple control receiver______________________ 4.6-9 Parametrizing the terminal designations ________________________ 4.3-6 Periodic memory__________________________________________ 4.13-8 Periodical meter check ________________________________________8-5 Phase angle _____________________________________________ 4.2-12 Phase connections _______________________________ 2-17, 4.1-9, 4.1-7
Landis+Gyr 11-8 H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

Phase current_______________________________________ 4.2-5, 4.2-11 Phase voltage_______________________________________ 4.2-5, 4.2-11 Phase voltage indication ______________________________________ 5-8 Possibilities for data readout ___________________________________ 6-9 Power calculation __________________________________________ 4.2-8 Power consumption _________________________________________ 2-12 Power factor__________________________________4.2-6, 4.2-11, 4.10-5 Power factor minimum ____________________________________ 4.10-7 Power factor monitoring ___________________________________ 4.14-9 Power factor register ______________________________________ 4.10-7 Power reserve of calendar clock __________________________2-13, 4.4-6 Power supply _______________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Primary data ____________________________________________ 4.8-12 Principle of DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Principle of monitoring_____________________________________ 4.14-5 Profile width _____________________________________ 4.13-14, 4.13-15 Profiles _________________________________________________ 4.13-5 Protection class ____________________________________________ 2-15 Pulse frequency of test output ________________________________ 2-13 Pulse inputs _______________________ 3-11, 4.1-9, 4.1-12, 4.1-7, 4.1-10 Pulse telegram ____________________________________________ 4.6-5 Pulse width of test output ____________________________________ 2-13 Purpose of this user manual __________________________________ 0-10 Purpose of use of meters _____________________________________ 2-6 Push buttons ________________________________________ 4.1-9, 4.1-7 Quadrant display ____________________________________________ 5-8 Quadrant numbering ______________________________________ 4.2-10 Quadrants _______________________________________________ 4.2-9 Quartz frequency __________________________________________ 4.4-6 Radio interference suppression ________________________________ 2-15 Range changeover ___________________________________________ 8-6 Range of time elements_____________________________________ 4.4-5 Rapid run ____________________________________________ 5-12, 5-15 Rated frequency____________________________________________ 2-12 Rated voltage______________________________________________ 2-11 Reactive component of power________________________________ 4.2-8 Reactive power _________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8, 4.2-9 Reactive power direction arrow_________________________________ 5-8 Reading head __________________________________________ 6-9, 8-10 Readout _________________4.4-10, 4.6-12, 4.8-11, 4.9-19, 4.10-9, 4.12-6 Readout device _____________________________________________ 6-9 Readout log _______________________________________________ 6-10 Readout of events ________________________________________ 4.13-8 Readout of load profile ___________________________________ 4.13-12 Readout to DLMS ___________________________________________ 6-12 Readout to IEC 62056-21 ____________________________________ 6-10 Real Time Clock (RTC)______________________________________ 4.4-5 Recording counting pulses for other physical media ________________ 2-6 Recording of demand ______________________________________ 4.9-5 Recording of energy _______________________________________ 4.8-5 Recording of energy consumption_______________________________ 6-9 Recording of measured values __________________________ 4.8-5, 4.9-5 Recording of operating messages ____________________________ 4.16-6 Recording period of load profile _____________________________ 4.13-8 Register capacity __________________________________________ 4.9-8 Register resolution ____________________________________ 4.8-8, 4.9-8
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-9

Register size _______________________________________4.8-11, 4.9-19 Regulations for the security ____________________________________1-6 Releasing connection from spring-loaded terminal _________________7-11 Removing connections in spring-loaded terminals _________________9-12 Repair centre ______________________________________________9-14 Repairing meters ___________________________________________9-14 Replacement battery ________________________________________8-11 Representation of type designations ____________________________0-11 Reset___________________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset block ______________________________________________ 4.12-5 Reset button R _____________________________________ 3-6, 5-6, 8-10 Resetting__________________________________________4.8-10, 4.9-13 Residual value processing ____________________________4.8-10, 4.9-11 Responsibilities for security ____________________________________1-5 Restoration of voltage _______________________________________2-14 Ripple control receiver (RCR) _____________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9, 4.6-6 Ripple control receiver data on tariff face plate _________________ 4.6-10 Rolling display______________________________________________5-10 Rolling mean value _________________________________________ 4.9-9 Rotating field _____________________________________________ 4.2-8 RPT01 parametrization tool __________________________________ 4.6-9 RS232 interface ________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-7 RS485 interface ________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-7 Running mean value of demand ______________________________ 4.9-9 S0 interface____________________________________ 4.1-12, 4.1-10, 6-6 Safety pictographs ___________________________________________1-5 Safety regulations____________________________________________1-6 Seal _______________________________________________________2-6 Seal component _________________________________________ 3-7, 3-8 Sealing pliers _______________________________________________7-5 Sealing with padlock__________________________________________3-7 Seals ______________________________________________________3-5 Season table ______________________________________________ 4.5-6 Secondary data___________________________________________ 4.8-12 Security attributes ________________________________________ 4.15-6 Security levels____________________________________________ 4.15-5 Security system __________________________________________ 4.15-5 Self-test ______________________________________________ 5-10, 9-5 Sending an SMS message ____________________________4.16-6, 4.16-8 Serial interface _____________________________________________2-14 Series designation ___________________________________________2-8 Service ____________________________________________________8-5 Service and repair centre _____________________________________9-14 Service list_____________________________________________ 5-6, 5-14 Service menu ______________________________________________5-15 Service mode ______________________________________________5-14 Set mode ____________________________________________ 5-15, 8-10 Setting mode not concluded ___________________________________9-9 Signal conversion _____________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-7 Signal preparation _________________________________________ 4.2-5 Signal processing _________________________ 4.1-10, 4.1-8, 4.2-6, 4.2-7 Signal processor ______________________________________4.2-5, 4.2-8 Signal transfer ___________________________________________ 4.9-19 Signal utilization _____________________________________4.1-10, 4.1-8 Signalling of operating messages_____________________________ 4.16-5 Simple mean value _________________________________________ 4.9-9
Landis+Gyr 11-10 H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

SMS control _____________________________________________ 4.16-8 SMS message____________________________________________ 4.16-6 Software version ____________________________________________ 2-9 Solid state relay ____________________________________________ 2-13 Spring-loaded terminals_________________________2-18, 3-9, 7-11, 9-12 Standard data _____________________________________________ 5-12 Starting current ____________________________________________ 2-11 Starting limit ______________________________________________ 2-11 Starting power ________________________________________ 2-11, 2-12 Starting test ________________________________________________ 8-8 Starting values _____________________________________________ 2-12 Status entry of load profile _________________________________ 4.13-8 Status indication arrows _____________________________________ 3-10 Status report of SMS message _____________________________ 4.16-12 Stored value_______________________________________ 4.8-10, 4.9-13 Stored values ___________________________________________ 4.13-13 Structure of error messages ___________________________________ 9-5 Structure of load profile____________________________________ 4.13-8 Subdivision of this user manual________________________________ 0-10 Substitute meter __________________________________ 8-5, 9-12, 9-14 Summer time _____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Supercap ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Supplementary power supply _____________________ 2-14, 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Supply voltages _____________________________________ 4.1-11, 4.1-9 Survey calendar clock ______________________________________ 4.4-5 Survey communication interfaces _______________________________ 6-5 Survey demand recording ___________________________________ 4.9-5 Survey energy recording ____________________________________ 4.8-5 Survey measuring unit______________________________________ 4.2-5 Survey monitoring functions ________________________________ 4.14-5 Survey Operating messages ________________________________ 4.16-5 Survey operating time registers _____________________________ 4.11-5 Survey power factors______________________________________ 4.10-5 Survey tariff control ________________________________________ 4.7-5 Survey Time switch ________________________________________ 4.5-5 Suryey resetting__________________________________________ 4.12-5 Suspension eyelet ___________________________________________ 7-7 Suspension triangle _____________________________________ 2-16, 7-8 SYNC control signal ________________________________________ 4.4-5 Synchronization intervals____________________________________ 4.4-7 Synchronizing by the external synchronization signal _____________ 4.4-6 Synchronizing via communication interface _____________________ 4.4-8 System error in microprocessor_________________________________ 9-9 Target group of this user manual ______________________________ 0-10 Tariff control __________________________________4.1-10, 4.1-8, 4.7-5 Tariff control signals _______________________________________ 4.7-6 Tariff control via ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-5 Tariff face plate ____________________________________________ 3-11 Tariff structure ____________________________________________ 4.5-5 Tariff switching ____________________________________ 4.9-13, 4.10-8 Tariff switching __________________________________________ 4.8-10 Technical data _____________________________________________ 2-11 Technical data of ripple control receiver ________________________ 4.6-9 Telemetering _______________________________________________ 2-6 Temperature coefficient______________________________________ 2-15 Temperature range _________________________________________ 2-15
H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index Landis+Gyr 11-11

Terminal cover _____________________________________ 2-6, 2-16, 3-5 Terminal designations ______________________________________ 4.3-7 Terminal dimensions ________________________________________2-18 Terminal layout________________________________________ 3-9, 4.3-5 Test key of ripple control receiver _____________________________ 4.6-9 Test mode___________________________________________ 4.8-11, 8-5 Test output ________________________________________________2-13 Test SMS message _______________________________________ 4.16-12 Test voltage ________________________________________________8-7 Testing meter _______________________________________________8-5 Time base ________________________________________________ 4.4-6 Time change ______________________________________________ 4.4-6 Time deviations ___________________________________________ 4.4-8 Time elements ____________________________________________ 4.4-5 Time measurement_________________________________________ 4.2-8 Time switch ______________________________________________ 4.5-5 Time window for reset block ________________________________ 4.12-5 Time-base error _____________________________________________9-6 Tools for installation of meters _________________________________7-5 Total active power _________________________________________ 4.2-9 Total apparent power ______________________________________ 4.2-10 Total operating time _______________________________________ 4.11-5 Total reactive power________________________________________ 4.2-9 Transmission contact _________________________________________2-6 Type designation ____________________________________________2-8 Type of measurement ZFD400xx ______________________________ 4.2-7 Type of measurement ZMD400xx _____________________________ 4.2-6 Types of display ____________________________________________5-10 Types of energy recording ___________________________________ 4.8-8 Types of error _______________________________________________9-6 Types of monitoring _______________________________________ 4.14-5 Types of synchronizing______________________________________ 4.4-6 Units field __________________________________________________5-8 Upper part of meter case ______________________________________2-6 Value display__________________________________________ 5-12, 5-15 Value field __________________________________________________5-8 Value of operating messages ________________________________ 4.16-6 Value register ________________________________________4.8-7, 4.9-7 Values available for readout and display __________ 4.9-20, 4.10-9, 4.12-6 Versions of communication units ________________________________6-6 Versions of energy recording ____________________________4.8-5, 4.9-5 Viewing window _____________________________________________2-6 Voltage divider ____________________________________________ 4.2-7 Voltage interruption _________________________________________2-14 Voltage monitoring ________________________________________ 4.14-7 Voltage range ______________________________________________2-11 Voltage restoration __________________________________________2-14 Weekdays ________________________________________________ 4.4-5 Weight of meter ____________________________________________2-16 Winter time _______________________________________________ 4.4-5 Zero passage _______________________________________4.2-8, 4.2-12 ZMD300CT _________________________________________________2-6

Landis+Gyr 11-12

H 71 0200 0141 c en - ZMD300 AT / CT - User Manual Index

You might also like